Seat Alhambra 2009 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 285
1 of 285

Summary of Content for Seat Alhambra 2009 Owner’s Manual PDF

SE AT

A LH

A M

B R

A O

W N

ER S

M A

N U

A L

In gl

s S

10 51

1A B

A 20

( 02

.0 9)

( G

T9 )

S1 05

11 AB

A2 0

A LH

A M

B R

A

In gl

s (0

2. 09

) Portada Alhambra.qxd 12/3/09 12:42 Pgina 3

SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.

Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.

No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.

SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.

Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.

SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.02.09

Portada ALHAMBRA_interior.qxd 12/3/09 15:45 Pgina 1

fully to familiarise yourself with

ontribute to preserving its value.

s and parts exchange.

as this should be kept with the

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 1 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Foreword This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read care

your vehicle.

Also, the regular care and maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle will c

For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification

If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner

vehicle.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 2 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Contents 3

oof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ooling and heating box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ting, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .

limatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

utomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

arking distance warning system* . . . . . . . . . . .

ruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

s and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xhaust gas emission control system . . . . . . . .

conomical and environmentally friendly driving

riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

railer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .

eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

are of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

are of the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149

150

153

153

161

161

162

163

165

167

168

174

175

177

181

181

181

187

187

188

189

191

192

195

195

196

201

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 3 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Contents

The structure of this manual . . . . .

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safe Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation of child seats in vehicle seats . . . . .

Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display in the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On board computer with multifunction display .

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key with remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sliding/tilting sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ashtrays, cigarette lighter and electrical sockets

AUX-IN Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard warning triangles and first aid kit . . . . .

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R

C

Hea

C

Driv

A

S

Ig

S

M

A

H

P

C

Tip

Inte

B

Driv

R

E

E

D

T

Clea

G

C

C

5

6

7

7

7

10

15

16

18

18

20

23

31

33

33

37

40

42

44

46

46

48

51

54

63

63

63

64

69

72

81

86

87

88

88

89

95

97

99

102

105

109

109

115

117

119

122

122

123

125

127

134

140

143

144

144

Contents4

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 4 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Accessories, parts replacement and

modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mobile telephones and two-way radios . . . . . . .

Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle tools*, spare wheel*, breakdown set* and

towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Breakdown set* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparation of anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sealing and inflating tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing a light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .

What you should be aware of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How are the figures measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.8l 110 kW (150 bhp) 6 gear . . .

Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gears

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gears

Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 85 kW (115 bhp).

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0l TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) 6 gears

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) 6 gears.

Ecomotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

204

204

204

205

205

206

208

208

209

209

211

214

218

220

223

225

227

233

233

235

236

236

237

238

243

245

250

252

255

257

257

257

259

260

260

262

262

263

264

266

267

269

270

272

273

The structure of this manual 5

The structure of this manual Before reading this manual it must be understood This manual contains a description of the vehicle equipment at the time of

publication. Some of the equipment described here will not be available until

a later date, or is available only in certain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALHAMBRA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive adver- tising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the

equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual

refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when

otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain

versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,

or else it is only on sale in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Even if the copyright symbol

does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted.

The section is continued on the following page.

This shows the end of the section.

WARNING

Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.

Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to

your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environ-

ment.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 5 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Content6

Content This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and

clearly as possible. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively

short sections making up chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire

manual is divided into five large parts which are:

1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat

belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the

vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, how to create a suitable

climate in the passenger compartment, etc.

3. Tips and Maintenance Advice relating to driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain

problems which you may solve yourself.

4. Technical Data Figures, data, dimensions and measurements (for example fuel consump-

tion) of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help

you to rapidly find the information you require.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 6 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Safe Driving 7

Safety Fir Technical Data

s a part of the occupant protection

the risk of injury during an accident.

fety and the safety of your passengers. In the

ty equipment could reduce the risk of injury. The

f the safety equipment in your SEAT:

t belts for all seats,

for driver and passenger,

r the front seats and outer seats in the second

nd passenger,

d passenger,

IX child seats in the outside seats in the second

estraints and

n.

ned above works together to provide you and

t possible protection in accident situations. But

t help you or your passengers if you or your

rect sitting position or do not properly adjust or

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 7 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Safety First

Safe Driving

Brief introduction

Dear SEAT Driver

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and

warnings that you should read and follow in the interest of your own

safety and the safety of your passengers.

WARNING

This manual contains important information concerning the driver's and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the vehicle wallet also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.

Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Safety equipment

The safety equipment i

system and can reduce

Never gamble with your sa

event of an accident, the safe

following list includes most o

optimised three-point sea

seat belt tension devices

Belt height adjustment fo

row,

frontal airbags for driver a

side airbags for driver an

curtain airbags,

ISOFIX anchorage for ISOF

and third rows,

Height-adjustable head r

adjustable steering colum

The safety equipment mentio

your passengers with the bes

this safety equipment canno

passengers assume an incor

use this equipment.

Safe Driving8

propriate child seats and properly

age 46.

ing position. Instruct your passengers

r sitting position page 10.

securely. Instruct your passengers also to

roperly page 18.

fety?

determined by your driving style and

of all occupants.

ble for yourself and your passengers.

r driving safety is affected, you endanger

n the road , for this reason:

be distracted from the traffic around you,

elephone conversations.

riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-

d speed limits.

ed as appropriate for road, traffic and

stances, take breaks regularly - at least

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 8 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Therefore, you have been provided with information about why this equip-

ment is so important, how it protects you, what you have to observe when

using it and how you and your passengers can achieve the greatest possible

benefit from the safety equipment fitted. This manual includes important

warnings that you and your passengers should observe in order to reduce the

risk of injury.

Safety is everyone's business!

Before every trip

The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the

operational worthiness of the vehicle.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note

the following points before every trip:

Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-

lessly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the

surroundings.

Securely restrain all parcels page 16.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly for your

size.

Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to

their height.

Protect children with ap

applied seat belts p

Assume the correct sitt

also to assume a prope

Fasten your safety belt

fasten their seat belts p

What affects driving sa

Driving safety is largely

the personal behaviour

As driver, you are responsi

When your concentration o

yourself as well as others o

Do not allow yourself to

e.g. by passengers or t

Never drive when your d

tion, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws an

Always reduce your spe

weather conditions.

When travelling long di

every two hours.

Safe Driving 9

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 9 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are under pres-

sure of time.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

Safe Driving10

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

he following adjustments for the driver:

el so that there is a distance of at least

ering wheel and the centre of your chest

orwards or backwards so that you are able

, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with

angled .

ch the highest point of the steering

nt so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

head fig. 2.

upright position so that your back rests

Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 10 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Proper sitting position for occupants

Proper sitting position for driver

The proper sitting position for the driver is important for safe

and relaxed driving.

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend t

Adjust the steering whe

25 cm between the ste

fig. 1.

Move the driver's seat f

to press the accelerator

your knees still slightly

Ensure that you can rea

wheel.

Adjust the head restrai

level as the top of your

level as the top of your

Move the backrest to an

completely against it.

Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel

Safe Driving 11

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 11 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Fasten your seat belt correctly page 18.

Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under

control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat page 122.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the hub of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.

Safe Driving12

ion prevents you from maintaining the contact a qualified workshop. The workshop l specific modifications are necessary.

he foot well when the vehicle is moving; never anel, out the window or on the seat. An incor-

you to an increased risk of injury in the event accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could an incorrect sitting position.

y to the front passenger during sudden cident, never travel with the backrest tilted far seat belts can only provide optimal protection right position and the front passenger is

roperly. The further the backrests are tilted to of injury due to incorrect positioning of the ing position!

properly to achieve maximum protection.

for passengers in the rear seats

idual seats must sit up straight, keep

s and wear their seat belts properly.

in the event of a sudden braking

passengers in the individual seats must

eat seat bench must be in the upright

ngaged in this position.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 12 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Proper sitting position for front passenger

The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the

dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest

possible protection in the event that it is triggered.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front

passenger:

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible .

Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests

completely against it.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same

level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same

level as the top of your head page 14.

Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the front passenger seat.

Fasten your seat belt correctly page 18.

It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circum- stances page 25.

Adjusting the front passenger's seat.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitut minimum distance of 25 cm, will help you decide if specia

Always keep your feet in t rest them on the instrument p rect sitting position exposes of a braking manoeuvre or an sustain severe injuries due to

To reduce the risk of injur braking manoeuvres or an ac back! The airbag system and when the backrest is in an up wearing his or her seat belt p the rear, the greater the risk belt web or the incorrect sitt

Adjust the head restraint

Correct sitting position

Passengers in the indiv

their feet in the footwell

To reduce the risk of injury

manoeuvre or an accident,

observe the following:

The backrest of the 3-s

position and securely e

WARNING (continued)

Safe Driving 13

Safety Fir Technical Data

oot well in front of the rear seat.

orrectly page 18.

ld restraint system when you take children

46.

rear seat are not sitting properly, they could

t properly to achieve maximum protection.

de optimal protection when backrests are in an sengers are wearing their seat belts properly. t are not sitting in an upright position, the risk

sitioning of the belt web increases.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 13 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same

level as the top of your head.

Keep both feet in the footwell in front of the individual seat.

Fasten your safety belt securely.

Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children

in the vehicle.

WARNING

If the passengers on the individual seats are not sitting properly, they could sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.

The seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrests are properly engaged in the upright position and the passengers are wearing their seat belts properly. If passengers on the individual seats are not sitting in an upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- tioning of the belt web increases.

Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats

Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their

feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking

manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must

observe the following:

Adjust the headrest to the correct position.

Keep both feet in the f

Fasten your seat belt c

Use an appropriate chi

in the vehicle page

WARNING

If the passengers on the sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restrain

Seat belts can only provi upright position and the pas If passengers on the rear sea of injury due to incorrect po

Safe Driving14

roperly to achieve maximum protection.

nt so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

head and, at the very least, at eye level

estraints removed or improperly adjusted njuries.

restraints could result in death in the event of

restraints also increase the risk of injury driving or braking manoeuvres.

always be adjusted according to the occu-

itting positions

tion can lead to severe injuries to

imal protection only when the belt webs

correct sitting positions substantially

tion of seat belts and increase the risk of

web position. As the driver, you are

occupants, especially children.

assume an incorrect sitting position in

ling .

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 14 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restraint p

Adjust the head restrai

level as the top of your

level as the top of your

fig. 3 and fig. 4.

WARNING

Travelling with the head r increases the risk of severe i

Incorrectly adjusted head a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted head during sudden or unexpected

The head restraints must pant's size.

Examples of incorrect s

An incorrect sitting posi

occupants.

Seat belts can provide opt

are properly positioned. In

reduce the protective func

injury due to incorrect belt

responsible for all vehicle

Never permit anyone to

the vehicle while travel

Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front

Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side

Safe Driving 15

Safety Fir Technical Data

dom of movement of all pedals must

bjects or floor mats.

ways press the accelerator, brake and

red to the floor.

can return unimpaired to their initial posi-

ve the pedal area free and can be securely

ke pedal must be free to move further than

ehicle to a stop.

port your feet properly and give you a good feel

ion can lead to critical situations while driving.

e driver foot well. An object could move into the operation. In the event of a sudden driving or l not be able to operate the brake, clutch or cident!

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 15 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be

dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to

make you aware of this issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

Never stand in the vehicle,

never stand on the seats,

never kneel on the seats,

never tilt your backrest far to the rear,

never lean against the dash panel,

never lie on the rear bench,

never sit on the front edge of a seat,

never sit sideways,

never lean out of a window,

never put your feet out of a window,

never put your feet on the dash panel,

never put your feet on the surface of a seat,

never travel in a foot well,

never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,

never carry any person in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags deploy, striking an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

Pedal area

Pedals

The operation and free

never be impaired by o

Ensure that you can al

clutch pedals unimpai

Ensure that the pedals

tions.

Use only floor mats which lea

fastened in the foot well.

If a brake circuit fails, the bra

normal in order to bring the v

Wear suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which sup

for the pedals.

WARNING

Restricting pedal operat

Never place objects in th pedal area and impair pedal braking manoeuvre, you wil accelerator pedal. Risk of ac

Safe Driving16

nly in the luggage compartment.

gage as far forward as possible in the

low as possible in the luggage compart-

the fitted fastening rings page 17.

objects in the luggage compartment can

e luggage compartment and secure them on

raps to secure heavy objects.

es or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of

d if a loose object is struck by an inflating ts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of

re of gravity may shift when transporting t the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- l to adjust your speed and driving style ts.

axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the ed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- change, leading to accidents, injuries and

unattended, especially when the tailgate is to the luggage compartment closing the door

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 16 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Floor mats on the driver side

Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened

in the foot well and do not impair operation of the pedals.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip

and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to

prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-

fied dealership.

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructed, you could cause an accident. Risk of serious injuries.

Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.

Stowing luggage

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in

the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the

driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the

centre of gravity.

Distribute the load eve

Lay and stow heavy lug

luggage compartment.

Stow heavy luggage as

ment.

Secure heavy objects to

WARNING

Loose luggage and other cause serious injuries.

Always stow objects in th the fastening rings.

Use suitable specialist st

During sudden manoeuvr forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increase airbag. If this happens, objec fatal injury.

Please note that the cent heavy objects; this may affec dent. Therefore, it is essentia accordingly, to avoid acciden

Never exceed the allowed allowed axle load or the allow acteristics of the vehicle may damage to the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb in

Safe Driving 17

Safety Fir Technical Data

ble seat belts for the third row of seats and the

can be used as fastening rings for items of

nt, even small and light objects can build up so

use very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic

ed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.

owever, is the speed of the vehicle.

4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During

of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-

ght. That means that the effective weight of the

kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries

his projectile strikes an occupant as it flies

artment. This increased risk of injury will be

bject is struck by an inflating airbag.

objects are secured to the fastening rings with taining cords, injuries could result in the event cidents.

age or other objects from flying forward, ining cords which are secured to the fastening

t on the fastening rings.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 17 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal risk.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every passenger must be properly belted in page 18.

Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used

air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-

ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.

Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially

available.

Fastening rings

There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment

which can be used to secure luggage and other objects.

Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage

and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the

luggage compartment on page 16.

Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.

The retainers for the detacha

floor anchorings for the seats

luggage.

During a collision or an accide

much energy that they can ca

energy depends on the spe

The most significant factor, h

Example: An object weighing

a frontal collision at a speed

sponding to 20 times its wei

object increases to about 90

which might be sustained if t

through the passenger comp

further increased if a loose o

WARNING

If pieces of baggage or other inappropriate or damaged re of braking manoeuvres or ac

To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate reta rings.

Never secure a child sea

WARNING (continued)

Seat belts18

er places, two individual front seats and three

ar seats are fitted with a three-point automatic

wo seats in the front, three seats in the second

row.

ple than there are seats available in the

icle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro-

*

s a reminder to the driver to fasten

:

securely.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 18 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Seat belts

Introduction

Before driving: remember your seat belt!

Properly worn seat belts can save lives!

In this chapter you will learn why seat belts are so important, how

they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.

Read and observe all the information as well as the warnings in

this chapter.

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- ries increases.

Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in the event of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. Therefore, you and your passen- gers should always wear the seat belts properly as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Pregnant women or persons with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other occupants, these persons can also sustain severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.

Number of seats

Vehicles with five seats

Your vehicle has five passeng

places on the rear seat.

The front seats and the outer re

seat belt.

Vehicles with seven seats*

The vehicle has seven seats, t

row and two seats in the third

WARNING

Never transport more peo vehicle.

Every occupant in the veh belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system.

Seat belt warning lamp

The warning lamp acts a

the seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle

Fasten your safety belt

Seat belts 19

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 19 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before

driving off.

Protect children by using child seats of the correct height for the

age of the child.

The warning lamp in the combi-instrument lights up if the driver seat belt

is not fastened when the ignition is switched on. In addition, an acoustic

signal can also be heard for a couple of seconds.

The warning lamp* does not go out until the driver seat belt is fastened

while the ignition is switched on.

Seat belts20

ws of physics work in the case of a head-on

s moving fig. 5 there is a certain amount of

rgy, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.

depends on the speed of the vehicle and the

sengers. The higher the speed and the greater

here is to be released in an accident.

wever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed

m/h, for example, the kinetic energy increases

r example are not restrained by seat belts, the

y has to be absorbed at the point of impact

50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-

ne (1,000 kg). At greater speed these forces

elts are not attached to the vehicle. In a

nue to move forward at the speed their vehicle

Fig. 6 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seatbelts

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 20 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Why wear seat belts?

Frontal collisions and the laws of physics

In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic

energy is generated.

It is easy to explain how the la

collision: When a vehicle start

energy known as kinetic ene

The amount of kinetic energy

weight of the vehicle and pas

the weight, the more energy t

The most significant factor, ho

doubles from 25 km/h to 50 k

by a factor of four.

Because the passengers in ou

entire amount of kinetic energ

fig. 6.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h to

sion can easily exceed one ton

are even higher.

Passengers not wearing seat b

frontal collision they will conti

Fig. 5 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seatbelts

Seat belts 21

Safety Fir Technical Data

s acting on the body in a collision are so great

oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,

wn forward and will make violent contact with

rd, windscreen or whatever else is in the way

bstitute for the seat belts. When deployed,

al protection. All occupants (including the

belts properly during the trip. This will reduce

he event of an accident regardless of whether

t.

gered only once. To achieve the best possible

t always be worn properly so that you will be

ch no airbag is deployed.

r passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they

rward violently in an accident. Rear passengers

danger not only themselves but also the front

Fig. 8 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 21 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal

accidents, but to all accidents and collisions.

The danger of not using the seat belt

Many people believe that the occupants can protect them-

selves with their hands in a minor collision, this is false.

Even at low speeds the force

that it is not possible to brace

unbelted passengers are thro

the steering wheel, dashboa

fig. 7.

The airbag system is not a su

airbags provide only addition

driver) must be wearing seat

the risk of severe injuries in t

an airbag is fitted for the sea

Note that airbags can be trig

protection, the seat belt mus

protected in accidents in whi

It is also important for the rea

could otherwise be thrown fo

who do not use seat belts en

occupants fig. 8.

Fig. 7 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Seat belts22

n seat belts before every trip, even when "just

ear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics

t belts to be an effective means of substantially

improving the chances of survival in a serious

ly worn seat belts improve the protection

nt of an accident. For this reason, wearing a

most countries.

ped with airbags, the seat belts must be

irbags, for example, are only triggered in some

bags will not be triggered during minor frontal

s, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the

control unit is not exceeded.

wear your seat belt and ensure that your

ir seat belts properly before you drive off!

eat belts

rrectly, they can reduce the risk of

elt as described in this booklet.

ts can be fastened at all times and are not

incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 22 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Seat belts protect

Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the

event of an accident.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-

tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.

Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to

severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of

being thrown from the car.

Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability

of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front crumple zones and other

passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to

absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these

features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk

of injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts

reduce substantially the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is

why it is so important to faste

driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers w

have shown properly worn sea

reducing the risk of injury and

accident. Furthermore, proper

provided by airbags in the eve

seat belt is required by law in

Although your vehicle is equip

fastened and worn. The front a

frontal accidents. The front air

collisions, minor side collision

airbag trigger threshold in the

Therefore, you should always

passengers have fastened the

Safety notes on using s

If seat belts are used co

injury in an accident.

Always wear the seat b

Ensure that the seat bel

damaged.

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.

Fig. 9 Driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking

Seat belts 23

Safety Fir Technical Data

a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts dified in any way.

lean, otherwise the retractors may not work

e buckle)

ont seats and the seats in the second

ned using one buckle.

its full protection if the belt web is not

Fig. 10 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 23 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. That applies also to your front and rear passengers danger of injury!

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mo

The belts must be kept c properly.

Seat belts

Fastening seat belt (on

The seat belts on the fr

and third row are faste

The seat belt cannot offer

positioned correctly.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Seat belts24

ith two buckles)

tre seat in the second row of seats is

les.

d restraint correctly.

tongue fig. 11 is pulled down.

o the buckle belonging to the seat and

securely locked with an audible click.

elt to pull the belt across your lap.

to the buckle belonging to seat and

securely locked with an audible click.

hat both latch plates are securely

.

Fig. 11 Fastening the seat belt on the centre seat in the second row of seats

A1

AA

A2

AB

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 24 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly

across your chest and lap .

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and

push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click

page 23, fig. 10.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in

the buckle.

Every seat belt is equipped with an automatic belt retractor on the shoulder

belt. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled

slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends

and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension

devices.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.

Fastening seat belts (w

The seat belt for the cen

fastened using two buck

Adjust the seat and hea

Pull the belt so that the

Insert latch plate int

push it down until it is

Use latch plate of the b

Insert latch plate in

push it down until it is

Pull the belt to ensure t

engaged in the buckles

A1

A2

Seat belts 25

Safety Fir Technical Data

ximum protection only when they are

Fig. 12 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front

Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 25 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

The seat belt for the centre seat in the second row of seats has a belt retractor

fitted in the car roof. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the

shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel

in mountains or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on

the seat belt is locked.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.

Note An illustration of how to fasten the seat belts can be found on each buckle.

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their ma

properly positioned.

Seat belts26

also fasten their seat belts properly

he unborn child is for the mother to

rly at all times during the pregnancy.

imum protection only when the belt web

age 25.

d head restraint correctly page 10.

pull the belt evenly across your chest and

the pelvis fig. 14.

to the buckle for the corresponding seat

it is securely locked with an audible click

hat the latch plate is securely engaged in

Fig. 14 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 26 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder

region:

Belt height adjustment for the front seats and the outer seats in the

second row,

front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the torso

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

Read and observe the warnings page 23.

Pregnant women must

The best protection for t

wear the seat belt prope

The seat belt provides max

is properly positioned p

Adjust the front seat an

Holding the latch plate,

as low as possible over

Insert the latch plate in

and push it down until

.

Pull the belt to ensure t

the buckle.

Seat belts 27

Safety Fir Technical Data

for the front seats and the outer seats in

ed to adjust the proper belt web position

fig. 15 of the shoulder belt guide in the

and hold it in this position.

t guide up or down until you have the seat

ble for your size.

elt guide.

e shoulder belt sharply to check that the

belt guide is engaged securely.

ith one buckle)

be unfastened until the vehicle has

Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 27 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.

Read and observe the warnings page 22.

Belt height adjustment

Using the height adjusters for the front seats and the outer

seats in the second row the position of the seat belts can be

adjusted in the shoulder area according to the height of the

occupant.

The seat belt adjustment

the second row can be us

at the shoulder.

Press the upper part direction of the arrow

Move the shoulder bel

belt in a position suita

Release the shoulder b

After adjusting, pull th

catch on the shoulder

Unfastening seatbelt (w

The seat belt must not

come to a standstill.

Fig. 15 Location of the belt height adjuster

Seat belts28

the belt buckle fig. 17 . The latch

rings out.

the belt buckle . The latch plate is

ut.

and holding both latches so that the belt

amaging the trim.

hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you g severe or fatal injuries.

A1

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 28 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Press the red button on the belt buckle page 27, fig. 16. The

latch plate is released and springs out .

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim

will not be damaged.

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

Unfastening seat belts (with two buckles)

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has

come to a standstill.

Press the red button in

plate is released and sp

Press the red button in

released and springs o

Guide the belt back by h

rolls up easily without d

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustainin

Fig. 17 Unfastening seat belt with two buckles

Seat belts 29

Safety Fir Technical Data

ok fig. 18 in the direction of the arrow

y pulling down.

h the spring hook up and hang the spring

fig. 19 -arrow- in the side trim.

k from the retainer and guide the seat belt

up until the spring hook functions again

in if the seat belt is twisted after it has been

te direction and reengage the spring hook

re that the hook is engaged properly. The hook t the vehicle is in motion if it has not been

l injury!

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 29 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Detachable seat belts

The seat belts in the third row of seats can be detached.

Detaching the seat belt

Push the the spring ho

and remove the hook b

Guide the seat belt wit

hook in the retainer

Fitting the seat belt

Remove the spring hoo

down.

Fir the hook and pull it

.

Remove the spring hook aga

fitted. Turn it in the appropria

securely.

WARNING

Pull on the seat belt to ensu could disengage itself whils properly fitted - Risk of fata

Fig. 18 Retainer with spring hook for the detachable seat belt

Fig. 19 Storage for the detached seat belt

Seat belts30

rs can be used to adjust the position

oulder.

or the front seats and the outer seats in

d to adjust the proper belt web position

fig. 21 of the shoulder belt guide in the

nd hold it in this position.

guide up or down until you have adjusted

ect position.

shoulder belt sharply to check that the

elt guide is engaged securely.

Fig. 21 Location of the belt height adjuster

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 30 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Belt retainer*

WARNING

When the belt for the outer seats in the centre row is removed insert the webbing behind the guide of the side trim fig. 20, in order to lower the backrest without damaging the webbing.

The seat belts must be removed from the holder before removing the individual seats. This means that the belts will not be damaged.

Belt height adjustment

Seat belt height adjuste

of the seat belt at the sh

The seat belt adjustment f

the second row can be use

at the shoulder.

Press the upper part direction of the arrow a

Move the shoulder belt

the seat belt to the corr

After adjusting, pull the

catch on the shoulder b

Fig. 20 Belt retainer for outer seats in centre row

Seat belts 31

Safety Fir Technical Data

es

sion device

n, the seat belts on the front seats are

.

cupants are equipped with belt tension devices.

ension devices during severe head-on, lateral

seat belt is being worn. This retracts and

ing the forward motion of the occupants.

e triggered only once.

not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,

hicle overturns, or in situations where no large

r rear of the vehicle.

are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is

hat there was a fire in the vehicle.

ements must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with

pleased to pass on the information to you.

f belt tension devices

components of the seat belts that are installed

you work on the belt tension devices or remove

when performing other repair work, the seat

nsequence may be that, in the event of an acci-

s function incorrectly or not at all.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 31 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Incorrectly fastened seat belts

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is

properly worn. This is particularly true of seat belts with two buckles.

The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order described in this

chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs substantially the

protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe or fatal injuries.

The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially increased when a

deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has assumed an incorrect

sitting position. As driver, you are responsible for the safety of all

vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:

Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in

the vehicle while travelling .

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.

Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 23 and page 28.

Belt tension devic

Function of the belt ten

During a frontal collisio

retracted automatically

The seat belts for the front oc

Sensors will trigger the belt t

and rear collisions only if the

tightens the seat belts, reduc

The belt tension device can b

The belt tension devices will

side or rear collision, if the ve

forces act on the front, side o

Note If the belt tension devices

normal and is no indication t

The relevant safety requir

components of the system are

these regulations and will be

Service and disposal o

The belt tension devices are

in the seats of your vehicle. If

and install parts of the system

belt may be damaged. The co

dent, the belt tension device

Seat belts32

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 32 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that

removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-

tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.

The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.

The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.

Airbag system 33

Safety Fir Technical Data

ag may inflict critical or fatal injuries upon the

ularly to children.

possible distance between yourself and the

nt airbags can completely deploy when trig-

um protection.

at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-

nd the speed of the vehicle.

ered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-

collision and detected by the control unit. If the

g during the collision and measured by the

e specified reference values, the front, side

t be triggered. Take into account that the visible

g an accident, for whatever reason, are not an

gs were triggered.

correctly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- tal injuries.

children, who are not properly belted can es if the airbag is triggered. You should always 2 years of age on the rear seat. Never transport y are not restrained or the restraint system is , size or weight.

eat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or position, the risk of injury is increased d risk of injury will be further increased if you bag.

ry from an inflating airbag, always wear the 8.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 33 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the

seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting

position must be assumed.

For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure

the following before you drive:

Always wear the seat belt properly page 18.

Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly

page 10.

Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 12.

Adjust the head restraint seat correctly page 14.

Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your

vehicle page 46.

The airbag deploys in fractions of a second and with a high velocity. If you

have assumed an incorrect seating position at that moment, you could

sustain critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all occupants maintain

a correct sitting position while travelling.

Braking heavily the moment before an accident may cause an occupant not

wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag.

In this case, the inflating airb

occupant. This applies partic

Always maintain the greatest

front airbag. This way, the fro

gered, providing their maxim

The most important factors th

dent, the angle of collision a

Whether the airbags are trigg

ation rate resulting from the

vehicle deceleration occurrin

control unit remains below th

and/or curtain airbag will no

damage in a vehicle followin

indication as to why the airba

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt in tion can lead to critical or fa

All occupants, including sustain critical or fatal injuri transport all children up to 1 children in the vehicle if the not appropriate for their age

If you are not wearing a s assume an incorrect sitting substantially. This increase are struck by an inflating air

To reduce the risk of inju seat belt properly page 1

Airbag system34

er airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat ainst the door, the roof or the backrest.

ances, it should be necessary to transport a at on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely e following safety measures:

e airbags for front passenger page 44.

approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.

instructions of the child seat manufacturer he warnings page 46.

ing the child seat, push the front passenger r so that the greatest possible distance to the ensured.

prevent the front passenger seat from being

nt passenger seat must be in an upright

and belt tensioner system

itors the airbag and belt tension

l airbags and belt tension devices in the

s and wiring connections.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 34 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Always properly adjust the front seats.

Conditions for fitting a rear facing childseat in the front passenger seat

Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front

passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.

An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major

danger to a child . The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child

if you transport the child in a rear-facing child seat. You should always trans-

port all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating

airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may

result.

Therefore we urgently recommend that you transport children on the rear

seats. That is the safest place in the vehicle for children. Alternatively, the

front and side airbags for the front passenger page 44 can be disabled

with the ignition key. When transporting children, use a child seat appro-

priate to the age and size of each child.

WARNING

If a child seat is mounted in the front passenger seat, the child is exposed to a greater risk in theevent of an accident.

Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.

An inflating front passeng and hurl it with great force ag

If, under special circumst child in a rear-facing child se essential that you observe th

Disabling front and sid

The child seat must be use on a front passenger

Follow the installation and absolutely observe t

Before properly install seat all the way to the rea front passenger airbag is

Ensure that no objects pushed completely back.

The backrest of the fro position.

Warning lamp for airbag

This warning lamp mon

device system.

The warning lamp monitors al

vehicle, including control unit

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 35

Safety Fir Technical Data

sal of the airbags

are installed in various places in your vehicle.

tem or remove and install parts of the system

r work, parts of the airbag system may be

may be that, in the event of an accident, the

does not inflate at all.

ents must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. The specialist workshops and the

familiar with these requirements.

out by a professional, or if the airbags are used e or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may e in the wrong circumstances.

thing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, fy them in any way.

ach any objects such as cup holders or tele- faces covering the airbag units.

eel or dash panel, you may use only a dry cloth . Never clean the dash panel and surface of the rs containing solvents. Solvents cause the f the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic injuries.

adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag

ystem or removal and installation of the airbag s (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should ified workshop. Qualified workshops have the mation and qualified personnel.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 35 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system

The functionality of the airbag and belt tension device system is constantly

monitored electronically. The warning lamp will light up for four seconds

every time the ignition is switched on (selfdiagnosis).

If at least one airbag has been deactivated in a specialised workshop, the

warning light flashes for 12 seconds before starting the engine. This does

not apply when the front and side airbags have been deactivated using the

key switch page 44.

The system must be checked when the warning lamp :

does not come on when the ignition is switched on,

does not go off after four seconds, after switching on the ignition,

goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,

or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In

addition, depending on the malfunction, an appropriate fault message

appears in the display1) of the instrument panel. In this event, you should

have a qualified workshop check the system immediately.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.

If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that, in the event of an acci- dent, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.

Repair, care and dispo

The parts of the airbag system

If you work on the airbag sys

when performing other repai

damaged. The consequence

airbag inflates incorrectly or

The relevant safety requirem

components of the airbag are

Vehicle disposal centres are

WARNING

If repairs are not carried incorrectly, the risk of sever fail to inflate, or could inflat

Do not cover or stick any plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modi

It is important not to att phone mountings to the sur

To clean the steering wh or one moistened with water airbag module with cleanse surface to become porous. I parts can cause substantial

Never attempt to repair, system.

Any work on the airbag s components for other repair be performed only by a qual necessary tools, repair infor

1) Depending on the version of the model.

Airbag system36

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 36 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

We urgently recommend that you go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.

Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.

The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 37

Safety Fir Technical Data

r is located in the steering wheel fig. 22 and

nger is located in the dash panel fig. 23.

text AIRBAG.

elts, the front airbag system gives the front

ion for the head and chest in the event of a

ge 38.

nction of restraining the occupants, the seat

front passenger in a position where the airbags

tion in a frontal collision.

bstitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of

safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

is most important to wear the seat belts at all

s required by law in most countries, but also for

irbag system are:

monitoring system (control unit),

ag with gas generator) for the driver and front

dash panel insert.

g system is monitored electronically. The airbag

r a few seconds every time the ignition is

if the warning lamp

he ignition is switched on, page 34,

seconds, after switching on the ignition,

on again after the ignition is switched on,

s while the car is moving.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 37 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Front airbags

Description of front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front airbag for the drive

the airbag for the front passe

Airbags are identified by the

In conjunction with the seat b

occupants additional protect

severe frontal collision pa

In addition to their normal fu

belts also hold the driver and

can provide maximum protec

The airbag system is not a su

the vehicle's overall passive

airbag system can only work e

seat belts. For this reason, it

times, not only because this i

your safety

The main parts of the front a

an electronic control and

the two front airbags (airb

passenger,

a warning lamp in the

The functionality of the airba

warning lamp will light up fo

switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system

does not come on when t

does not go off after four

goes out and then comes

or if it comes on or flicker

Fig. 22 Driver airbag located in steering wheel

Fig. 23 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel

Airbag system38

s

the risk of head or chest injury.

so that the front airbags for the driver and front

evere frontal collision.

e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

the airbags fill with a propellant gas and

d front passenger fig. 24. The fully deployed

ovement of the front occupants and help to

head and the upper part of the body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

ected by the airbag. Once the impact has been

sufficiently for the front occupants to see

Fig. 24 Inflated front airbags

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 38 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

The front airbag system will not be triggered if:

if the ignition is switched off,

during a minor frontal collision,

during a minor side collision,

during a rear-end collision,

or if the vehicle rolls.

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly.

If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a frontal collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Function of front airbag

Inflated airbags reduce

The airbag system is designed

passenger are triggered in a s

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered,

deploy in front of the driver an

airbags cushion the forward m

reduce the risk of injury to the

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and prot

absorbed, the airbag deflates

forward.

Airbag system 39

Safety Fir Technical Data

ositioned correctly for the height of the occu-

eat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or position, the risk of injury is increased d risk of injury will be further increased if you bag.

the front seat without an appropriate restraint ered in an accident, children can sustain the airbag as it inflates page 46.

front of the vehicle must never carry any ment space between them and the airbags, or engers to travel in this position.

ection for one accident only, if they have been aced.

o attach any objects such as cup holders or surfaces covering the airbag units.

d on the windscreen area above the passenger ebooks or telephone holders. If the airbag is

y fly uncontrollably around the vehicle interior

y components of the airbag system in any

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 39 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication

that there was a fire in the vehicle.

The function of the airbag covers if the airbags are triggered

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver

and front passenger airbags deploy. The airbag covers remain connected to

the steering wheel or the dash panel.

Safety notes on front airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

When the front airbags are triggered they fill the zones marked in red (radius

of action). Therefore additional accessories should never be placed in these

areas ,

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver

and front passenger airbags deploy. The airbag covers remain connected to

the steering wheel or the dash panel.

WARNING

It is important that the driver keeps at a minimum of 25 cm from the steering wheel It is important that the passenger moves the seat back as far as possible, to keep a safe distance away from the instrument panel. Failure to respect the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury. In addition, the front seats and head

restraints must always be p pant.

If you are not wearing a s assume an incorrect sitting substantially. This increase are struck by an inflating air

Never let a child travel on system. If the airbag is trigg serious or fatal injuries from

Occupants sitting in the objects or pets in the deploy allow children or other pass

The airbags provide prot deployed they must be repl

It is also important not t telephone mountings to the

Nothing should be place side airbag, for example not activated, these objects ma and could cause injury.

Do not attempt to modif way.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system40

stitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of

afety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

s most important to wear the seat belts at all

required by law in most countries, but also for

t be triggered

off,

on,

ision,

,

ystem are

onitoring system (control unit),

es of the backrests of the front seats,

ash panel insert.

system is monitored electronically. The airbag

a few seconds every time the ignition is

s can only provide maximum protection if the ly.

he airbag system, have the system checked orkshop. Otherwise there is a danger that ystem may fail to trigger, or not trigger

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 40 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Side airbags

Description of side airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger seat back-

rests fig. 25.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat

occupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe

side collision page 41, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag

system.

In a side collision the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on

the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their

normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also

hold the passengers on the front seats in a position where the side airbags

can provide maximum protection.

The airbag system is not a sub

the vehicle's overall passive s

airbag system can only work e

seat belts. For this reason, it i

times, not only because this is

your safety.

The side airbag system will no

if the ignition is switched

during a minor side collisi

during a minor frontal coll

during a rear-end collision

or if the vehicle rolls.

The main parts of the airbag s

an electronic control and m

the side airbags in the sid

a warning lamp in the d

The functionality of the airbag

warning lamp will light up for

switched on (self-diagnosis).

WARNING

The seat belts and airbag occupants are seated correct

If a fault should occur in t immediately by a qualified w during a side collision, the s correctly.

Fig. 25 Side airbag in left rear seat

Airbag system 41

Safety Fir Technical Data

ags to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts

hould be used only for lightweight clothing. Do p-edged objects in the pockets.

d blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the system may be damaged. In this case the side

red.

should protective covers be fitted over the er seat unless the covers have been expressly icle. Because the airbag deploys from the side nventional seat covers would obstruct the side he airbag's effectiveness.

al seat upholstery or around the seams of the paired immediately by a qualified workshop.

ection for one accident only, if they have been aced.

n incorrect sitting position, they expose them- f injury in the event of an accident. This is

hild is travelling on the front passenger seat ggered in an accident; this could have critical ious injury or death page 46.

bag system or removal and installation of the r repairs (such as removal of the front seat) y a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may tion of the airbag system.

y components of the airbag system in any

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 41 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Function of side airbags

Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury.

In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the

vehicle.

In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.

In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication

that there was a fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the

front seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.

The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.

Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system

Correct behaviour considerably reduces the risk of injury.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury should the side airbag system be triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airb prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.

The built-in coat hooks s not leave any heavy or shar

Great forces, such as har backrest bolster because the airbags would not be trigge

Under no circumstances driver seat or front passeng approved for use in your veh of the backrest, the use of co airbag, seriously reducing t

Any damage to the origin side airbag units must be re

The airbags provide prot deployed they must be repl

When children assume a selves to an increased risk o particularly the case if the c and the airbag system is tri consequences including ser

Any work on the side air airbag components for othe should only be performed b be introduced into the opera

Do not attempt to modif way.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system42

airbag system are:

onitoring system (control unit),

s with gas generator) for the driver, front

the rear seats,

ash panel insert.

system is monitored electronically.

l not be triggered

off,

,

on,

irbag system, have the system checked imme- op. Otherwise there is a danger that during a l to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 42 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Curtain airbags

Description of curtain airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors

fig. 26 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-

pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a

severe side collision page 40.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of

the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this

reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only

because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety.

The main parts of the curtain

an electronic control and m

the curtain airbags (airbag

passenger and passengers on

a warning lamp in the d

The functionality of the airbag

The curtain airbag system wil

if the ignition is switched

during a frontal collision,

during a rear-end collision

if the vehicle rolls,

during a minor side collisi

WARNING

If a fault should occur in the a diately by a qualified worksh collision, the system may fai

Fig. 26 Location of left curtain airbag

Airbag system 43

Safety Fir Technical Data

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

eration of the curtain airbag system

ctly, they can considerably reduce the

inds of accident.

ags to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts

ead air bag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.

ersons, animals or objects between the occu- the deployment space of the curtain airbags n deploy without restriction and provide the . Therefore, sun blinds which have not been n your vehicle may not be attached to the side

hould be used only for lightweight clothing. Do -edged objects in the pockets. When using the clothes on coat hangers.

ection for one accident only, if they have been aced.

airbag system or removal and installation of ther repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) y a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may tion of the airbag system.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 43 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Function of curtain airbags

Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

a side collision.

During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side

of the vehicle fig. 27.

In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-

gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the

process, the curtain bag covers the side windows and door pillars.

In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication

that there was a fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and

help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant p

chest are surrounded and pro

Safety notes on the op

If you use airbags corre

risk of injury in many k

WARNING

In order for the side airb prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.

For safety reasons, the h vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to

There must be no other p pants of the outer seats and so that the curtain airbag ca greatest possible protection expressly approved for use i windows.

The built-in coat hooks s not leave any heavy or sharp coat hooks, do not hang the

The airbags provide prot deployed they must be repl

Any work on the curtain the airbag components for o should only be performed b be introduced into the opera

Fig. 27 Deployed curtain airbags

Airbag system44

d to disconnect the front and side airbag

the other airbags in the vehicle remain

irbags for front passenger

ent on instrument panel.

turn the switch to OFF fig. 28.

ion is switched on, that the warning lamp

he instrument panel fig. 29 remains lit

ent on instrument panel.

bags for front passenger

Fig. 29 Warning lamp for disabling airbag in dash panel

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 44 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way, this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.

Deactivating airbags*

Disabling front passenger front and side airbags

The passenger airbags must be disconnected when a rear

facing child seat is fitted in the front passenger seat.

The key switch can be use

for the passenger seat. All

functional.

Disabling front and side a

Switch off ignition.

Open centre compartm

Using the ignition key,

Check if, when the ignit

PASS AIRBAG OFF on t

.

Close centre compartm

Enabling front and side air

Switch off ignition.

WARNING (continued)

Fig. 28 Interior of centre compartment on instru- ment panel: Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbags

Airbag system 45

Safety Fir Technical Data

m inspected immediately by a qualified work-

t on the front passenger seat! The front and ay deploy during an accident in spite of the

rmine whether the front or side airbags will be ent. Inform your passengers of this.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 45 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Open centre compartment on instrument panel.

Using the ignition key, turn the switch to ON page 44, fig. 28.

Check if, when the ignition is switched on, that the warning lamp

PASS AIRBAG OFF on the instrument panel page 44, fig. 29

does not light up .

Close centre compartment on instrument panel.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.

You should only disable the front and side passenger airbags if, in exceptional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 46.

Never fit a child seat in the passenger seat, where the child faces back- wards to the direction of travel and the frontal airbag has not been deacti- vated. This is highly dangerous for the child. However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.

As soon as the child seat will no longer be used on the front passenger seat, enable the front and side passenger airbag again.

Only deactivate the front and side passenger airbag when the ignition is off, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create the risk of the front, curtain or side airbag not deploying properly or not at all in the event of an accident.

If, while the front and side passenger airbag are turned off, the indi- cator PASS. AIRBAG OFF does not remain lit, this could indicate a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag syste shop.

Do not use a child sea side passenger airbag m fault.

It is impossible to dete triggered in case of accid

WARNING (continued)

Child safety46

de the manufacturer's directions for child seat

lways keep them in the vehicle.

hild seats

s substantially reduces the risk of

onsible for any children you transport in

properly using appropriate child seats.

belt webbing is properly positioned

tions provided by the manufacturer of the

allow children to distract you from traffic.

uring long trips. Take a break at least

de the manufacturer's directions for child seat

lways keep them in the vehicle.

e passenger seat, where the child faces back- el and the frontal airbag has not been deacti- us for the child. If it is necessary, in excep-

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 46 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Child safety

Brief introduction

Introduction

Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear

seat than on the front passenger seat.

We recommend that children under 12 years of age be transported on the rear

seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or

the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and weight. For

safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in the centre of

the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.

The physical principles involved and the forces acting in a collision apply to

children just as much as adults page 20. But unlike adults, children do not

have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children

are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-

sories Program including systems for all ages made by Peke2).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with

the ECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe

page 46.

We recommend that you inclu

use in the vehicle wallet and a

Safety notes on using c

Proper use of child seat

injury in an accident!

As the driver, you are resp

your vehicle.

Protect your children by

Always ensure that the

according to the instruc

child seat.

When travelling, do not

Take breaks regularly d

every two hours.

We recommend that you inclu

use in the vehicle wallet and a

WARNING

Never fit a child seat in th wards to the direction of trav vated. This is highly dangero2) Not for all countries

Child safety 47

Safety Fir Technical Data

r its full protection if the belt web is not posi-

py a child seat.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 47 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

tional circumstances, to transport a child on the front passenger seat, always disable the front passenger airbag page 44.

All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and other occupants.

If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is trav- elling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have consequences including serious injury or death.

A suitable child seat can protect your child!

Make sure that no hard or sharp objects, for example toys, are on the child seats. Risk of injury.

Never leave a child unsupervised in a child seat or alone in the vehicle.

Depending on the time of year, the interior of a parked vehicle can reach extreme temperatures which may endanger the life of people and animals.

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child restraint system, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision or sudden braking manoeuvres.

The seat belt cannot offe tioned correctly.

Only one child may occu

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Child safety48

ats

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

d.

t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration fig. 30.

ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

de the manufacturer's directions for child seat

lways keep them in the vehicle.

ormation and warnings concerning the use of

Fig. 30 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 48 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable

for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R means: Economic

Commission for Europe Regulation

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Group 0: Children up to 10 kg

Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard

bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number

below it).

Group 0 and 0+ child se

A suitable child seat and

help to protect your chil

Group 0: For babies from abou

suitable seats are those appe

Group 0+: For babies from abo

suitable seats are those appe

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend that you inclu

use in the vehicle wallet and a

WARNING

Read and always observe inf child seats page 46.

Child safety 49

Safety Fir Technical Data

ats

d a correctly adjusted seat belt can

ld.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

ude the manufacturer's directions for child seat

always keep them in the vehicle.

weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best

ats in conjunction with properly adjusted seat

eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5

by seat cushions with head restraints in

rn seat belts fig. 32.

Fig. 32 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 49 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Group 1 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can

help to protect your child.

Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the

rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing

between 9 and 18 kg.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat

use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats

Group 2 and 3 child se

A suitable child seat an

help to protect your chi

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend that you incl

use in the vehicle wallet and

Group 2 child seats

Children under 7 years of age

protected by group 2 child se

belts.

Group 3 child seats

Children over 7 years of age w

metres tall are best protected

conjunction with properly wo

Fig. 31 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Child safety50

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 50 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

WARNING

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the torso. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 23, Seat belts.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 46.

Child safety 51

Safety Fir Technical Data

hild on the front passenger seat, you must side passenger airbags page 44.

child seat appropriate to their weight and

ways be fitted in the direction of travel when ems in weight class 0 or 0+.

information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 46.

follow the information and warnings provided rer.

nd row of seats and seats in the third

ially approved child seat corre-

and height of the child is permitted.

the second and third row universal child seats

page 54) may be fitted.

OFIX child seats specially designed for this type

regulation ECE-R 44 .

child seat

ms for any group can be fitted to this seat if the

54, Integrated child seat is not used .

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 51 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Installation of child seats in vehicle seats

General notes

The correct fitting of child seats in the different seats is described below.

Child restraint systems that have been checked according to ECE-R 44 are

suitable for installation on the front passenger seat or on the rear seats.

Note The passenger seat and the rear seats comply with directive 77/541 EEC for

the installation of child restraint systems.

Front passenger seat

Only the use of an officially approved child seat corre-

sponding to the weight and height of the child is permitted.

Universal seats for children in groups 0, 0+, 1, 2, or 3 ( page 54) can

be fitted in the passenger seat.

To fit a child seat, position the seat in the upright position and move the

passenger seat as far back as possible. The seat must be in the highest posi-

tion3) on vehicles with a height-adjustable front passenger seat.

WARNING

Never fit a child seat in the passenger seat, where the child faces back- wards to the direction of travel and the frontal airbag has not been deacti- vated. This is highly dangerous for the child. If it is necessary in excep-

tional cases to transport a c always disable the front and

Children must travel in a height.

The vehicle seat must al securing child restraint syst

Read and always observe of child seats in Safe

Please always read and by the child seat manufactu

Outer seats in the seco row of seats

Only the use of an offic

sponding to the weight

In the outer seats of seats in

for groups 0, 0+, 1, 2, or 3 (

Seat with ISOFIX retainers

These seats are suitable for IS

of vehicle in accordance with

Vehicle seat with integrated

Universal child restraint syste

integrated child seat page

3) Optional equipment

WARNING (continued)

Child safety52

oint roof anchored belt is not suited to 3.

ays be fitted in the direction of travel when ms in weight class 0 or 0+.

child seat appropriate to their weight and

information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 46.

llow the information and warnings provided er.

o further ISOFIX restraint systems can be fitted

e an ISOFIX system has been fitted to the centre

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 52 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

WARNING

Children must travel in a child seat appropriate to their weight and height.

The vehicle seat must always be fitted in the direction of travel when securing child restraint systems in weight class 0 or 0+.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Please always read and follow the information and warnings provided by the child seat manufacturer.

Note Due to space limitation, only the two outer seats can be used if two ISOFIX

system seats are to be fitted in the second row of seats.

Centre seat in the second row of seats (with three-point roof- anchored belt)

Only the use of an officially approved child seat corre-

sponding to the weight and height of the child is permitted.

The centre seat with the three-point roof-anchored belt is suitable for weight

classes 0 to 2 .

Seat with ISOFIX retainers

Child seats fitted with the ISOFIX system can be used on the centre seat if it

is equipped with ISOFIX retainers .

WARNING

The central seat with three-p universal child seats in group

The vehicle seat must alw securing child restraint syste

Children must travel in a height.

Read and always observe of child seats in Safe

Please always read and fo by the child seat manufactur

Note Due to space limitations, n

in the second row of seats onc

seat.

Child safety 53

Safety Fir Technical Data

he child seat, please be sure to follow the

ns.

to the ISOFIX retaining rings fig. 33

seat can be heard to engage securely.

e child seat to ensure that it is secure.

in seats equipped with the ISOFIX system,

in one of two positions fig. 34 or .

e secured to the body behind the seats in the

OFIX retaining rings are attached to the seat

tings are available from Authorised SEAT Service

esigned only for use with ISOFIX child seats.

elts, objects or non-ISOFIX child seats to the l accidents.

A1 A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 53 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

ISOFIX child seat mounting system

ISOFIX child seats can be mounted in the second and third

row seats quickly, safely and easily.

When removing or fitting t

manufacturer's instructio

Press the child seat on

(arrows) until the child

Pull on both sides of th

When a child seat is mounted

the backrest should be fitted

Two ISOFIX retaining rings ar

second and third rows. The IS

frames.

Child seats with ISOFIX moun

Centres.

WARNING

The retaining rings are d

Never secure retaining b fastening rings. Risk of fata

Fig. 33 Retaining rings for ISOFIX child seats in the frames of the outer seats in the second row of seats

Fig. 34 Backrest adjust- ment when using ISOFIX child seats

Child safety54

d seat

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

d.

t in the direction of the arrow fig. 35

in direction of the arrow until it

down the child seat cushion in direction

cushion up.

Fig. 35 Using the inte- grated child seat

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 54 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Integrated child seat

Basic information on the integrated child seat

Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of

injury in an accident!

It can be adjusted to suit the child's size and is suitable for children in the

following groups according to the ECE-R 44 norm: Group 1 (9 - 18 Kg), Group

2 (15 - 25 kg) and Group 3 (22 - 36 kg).

The integrated child seat for children in the Groups 1 and 2 must be used with the slumber roll delivered with the seat.

For safety reasons, we recommend that the child seat for children in Group 1

is installed facing against the direction of travel. To do this, simply remove

the seat and fit it again facing in the opposite direction. The child must be

fastened in using the harness belt.

The child seat may only be fitted in the direction of travel for children in Groups 2 and 3 who are fastened in using the three-point belt fitted in the vehicle.

WARNING

With the integrated child seat, the backrest may only be adjusted to the first or second backrest position for children in Groups 1 to 3.

The slumber roll must always be fitted for children in Groups 1 and 2.

The integrated child seat must not be modified in any way.

Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

If the child seat or any parts of the seat are damaged, or if the child seat has to withstand the force of a collision in an accident, the seat, or part of the seat, must be replaced - preferably by a qualified dealership.

Group 1 integrated chil

A suitable child seat and

help to protect your chil

Setting up the child seat

Pull the loop to the fron

.

Push the seat cushion

engages in position.

Pull the loop to fold

of arrow .

Restoring the normal seat

First fold the child seat

A1

A3

A4

Child safety 55

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing for larger children in Group 1

t belt helps to protect your child!

fig. 36 of the support off the Velcro

de the two shoulder belts in the side slots

.

t under the belts and secure it .

e two belts in the side slots to the lower position

ust be pressed onto the seat in the area of the y that the belts can move freely in the slots.

Fig. 36 Integrated child seats. adjusting the belt routing

AA

6

AA

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 55 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Pull the loop in the direction of the arrow and push the seat

cushion down until it engages.

Fitting the slumber roll

Remove the head restraint.

Fit the head restraint onto the slumber roll.

Reinsert the head restraint and push down until it can be heard

to engage.

Removing the slumber roll

Remove the head restraint.

Pull the slumber roll off the head restraint.

Reinsert the head restraint and push down until it can be heard

to engage.

For safety reasons, we recommend that the child seat for children in Group 1

is installed facing against the direction of travel.

Adjusting the belt rout

A correctly adjusted sea

Pull the upper part fasteners to the front.

For larger children, gui

to the upper position

Then push the suppor

For smaller children, guide th

.

WARNING

The support fig. 36 m Velcro fastener in such a wa

A1

A

A7

AA

Child safety56

bottom is as far back on the seat as

ht and left over the child's shoulders.

ent fig. 37 with the tongue through

.

th the tongue at the front into the lock

e (Pull to ensure they are securely

ective cushion is always underneath

e harness belt fig. 38 down in the

ntil the belt fits firmly against the body of

s fit firmly against the body of the child (even so that the child seat can provide the on possible.

AB

AC

AD

AE

A1

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 56 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Fastening the harness belt for children in Group 1

A correctly adjusted seat belt helps to protect your child!

Sit the child so that its

possible.

Place the belt to the rig

Push the belt lock elem

the other lock element

Insert both elements wi

until they click into plac

engaged!).

Make sure that the prot

the belt lock .

Pull the upper part of th

direction of the arrow u

the child.

WARNING

The harness belt must alway with thick or winter clothing) maximum amount of protecti

Fig. 37 Integrated child seats. closing harness belt

Fig. 38 Integrated child seats. adjusting harness belt

AD

Child safety 57

Safety Fir Technical Data

ld seat

d a correctly adjusted seat belt can

ld.

nt in the direction of the arrow fig. 40

in direction of the arrow until it

aint out of the backrest of the integrated

the head restraint together with the

belt

rt of the belt underneath the slumber roll.

Fig. 40 Integrated child seats. lift up the cushion

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 57 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Releasing the harness belt for children in Group 1

A correctly adjusted seat belt helps to protect your child!

Press and hold the release button fig. 39 in the direction

of the arrow.

With the release button pressed, pull the lower part of the

harness belt down in the direction of the arrow.

Group 2 integrated chi

A suitable child seat an

help to protect your chi

Setting up the child seat

Pull the loop to the fro

.

Push the seat cushion

engages in position.

Remove the head restr

child seat and replace

slumber roll .

Fastening the three-point

Guide the shoulder pa

Fig. 39 Integrated child seats. adjusting harness belt

A2

A3 A1

AA

Child safety58

belt should be positioned roughly over the across the neck, and fit closely against the

across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and fitting of the belt.

d seat

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

d.

t in the direction of the arrow fig. 41

Fig. 41 Using the inte- grated child seat

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 58 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

To fasten the three-point belt, take hold of the tongue and pull it

slowly across the chest and lap.

Push the tongue of the belt into the lock for that seat so that it

engages audibly (pull to check!).

Adjust the three-point belt to suit body size .

Restoring the normal seat

Pull the loop in the direction of the arrow and push the seat

cushion down until it engages.

Removing the slumber roll

Remove the head restraint.

Pull the slumber roll off the head restraint.

Reinsert the head restraint and push down until it can be heard

to engage.

Use the following measures to guarantee the proper routing of the shoulder

belt:

Seatbelt height setting

Adjustment of the seat forwards and backwards

Backrest angle adjustment

WARNING

For safety reasons, the seat for children in Group 2 may only be fitted in the direction of travel and in one of the outer positions (not on the centre seat).

The risk of injury is increased if the belt is not correctly routed.

The shoulder part of the centre of the shoulder, never upper part of the body.

The lap belt part must lie always fit closely. check the

Group 3 integrated chil

A suitable child seat and

help to protect your chil

Setting up the child seat

Pull the loop to the fron

.

A1

WARNING (continued)

A1

Child safety 59

Safety Fir Technical Data

across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and fitting of the belt.

fully and undo it at the end.

Velcro fastening in area .

the harness belts through the cover and

cover.

ashed in a washing machine at a maximum

Fig. 42 Section of inte- grated child seat

AA

AB

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 59 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Push the seat cushion in direction of the arrow until it

engages in position.

Fastening the three-point belt

To fasten the three-point belt, take hold of the tongue and pull it

slowly across the chest and lap.

Push the tongue of the belt into the lock for that seat so that it

engages audibly (pull to check!)

Adjust the three-point belt to suit body size .

Restoring the normal seat

Pull the loop in the direction of the arrow and push the seat

cushion down until it engages.

Use the following measures to guarantee the proper routing of the shoulder

belt:

Seatbelt height setting

Adjustment of the seat forwards and backwards

Backrest angle adjustment

WARNING

For safety reasons, the seat for children in Group 3 may only be fitted in the direction of travel and in one of the outer positions (not on the centre seat).

The risk of injury is increased if the belt is not correctly routed.

The shoulder part of the belt should be positioned roughly over the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck, and fit closely against the upper part of the body.

The lap belt part must lie always fit closely. check the

Cleaning the child seat

Open the zip fig. 42

Pull the cover from the

Guide the belt lock and

remove the child seat

The child seat cover can be w

temperature of 30C.

A2

A1

WARNING (continued)

Child safety60

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 60 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

WARNING

When refitting the child seat cover, please ensure that the cover is fitted to the seat in the area of the Velcro fastening in such a way that the belts can move freely in the slots.

61

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 61 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

62

Fig. 4

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 62 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

3 Instrument panel

Overview 63

Safety Fir Technical Data

witch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

e control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ry switch

partment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

owage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

trols* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ent lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ipment listed here are fitted only on certain

ptional extras.

ing wheel on the right, the layout of the control

nt. But the symbols assigned to the controls

sed in the versions with the steering wheel on

111

175

126

135

37

134

167

140

102

174

161

243

213

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 63 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Operating instructions

Overview

Overview of the instrument panel

This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the

controls and displays.

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric wing mirror adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric window control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument lighting control / Headlamp range control . . . . . . .

Air outlets

main beam and turn signal light lever/ Cruise control* / . . . . .

Instrument panel / warning lights / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horn / Driver's airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switches for:

rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

windscreen heater* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

left seat heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ESP* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio

Cup holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central upper stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switches for:

hazard warning light s

PDC* (parking distanc

right seat heating* .

cover for supplementa

Glove box/Stowage com

Passenger airbag* . . .

Passenger side upper st

Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . .

Ash tray/ lighter . . . . .

Electric side window con

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . .

Pedals

Steering control adjustm

Fusebox cover . . . . . . .

Unlock bonnet lever . .

Note Some of the items of equ

models/model years or are o

In versions with the steer

elements is somewhat differe

correspond to the symbols u

the left

A1 93

A2 120

A3 102

A4 110

A5 110

A6

A7 112, 177

A8 64, 72

A9 37

A10 163

A11 117

A12

116

116

126

184

A13 153

A14

A15 137

A16 135

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

A25

A26

A27

A28

Overview64

/ trip recorder) page 67

s the engine speed in revolutions per

irectly over the 2, this corresponds to an engine

s per minute) fig. 44 .

. 44 Detailed view of dash panel instrument panel

A1

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 64 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Instruments

Instrument overview

The instruments display the vehicle operating status.

Rev counter page 64

Engine coolant temperature gauge page 65

Display in the combi-instrument4) and warning lamps page 724)

Fuel gauge page 66

Speedometer

Engine oil temperature gauge4) page 66

Clock page 67

Setting knob for the clock

Adjust kilometre button

Odometer (total mileage

Voltmeter4) page 67

Rev counter

The rev. counter display

minute.

If, for example, the needle is d

speed of 2000 rpm (revolution

Fig

4) Optional equipment

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

Overview 65

Safety Fir Technical Data

en the ignition is switched on. The symbol

display for some seconds as a function

d heavy engine loads fig. 45 .

the needle should be in the middle section of

ay also rise when the engine is working hard,

peratures. This is no cause for concern, as long

not light up page 72.

ight up if the needle is in the warning zone. The

OOLANT SERVICE MANUAL may also appear in

. Stop the car and switch off the engine.Allow

the coolant level .

rrect do not continue driving. You should obtain

ngs Working in the engine compartment o carry out work in the engine compartment.

inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At

d high engine loads, there is a risk of the

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 65 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed

which may be used briefly when the engine is warm and after it has been run

in properly. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector

lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the

red zone.

Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of

engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise engine

noise.

Engine coolant temperature display

This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.

The display only works wh

will also light up in the

check.

Needle in cold zone

Avoid high engine speeds an

Needle in normal zone

In normal driving conditions,

the scale. The temperature m

especially at high outside tem

as the warning lamp does

Needle in warning zone

The warning lamp will l

warning text5) STOP CHECK C the combi-instrument display

the engine to cool and check

Even if the coolant level is co

technical assistance.

WARNING

Read and observe the warni before opening the bonnet t

Caution Accessories in front of the air

high outside temperatures an

engine overheating.

Fig. 45 Instrument panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge 5) Depending on model version

AA

AB

AC

AC

A9

Overview66

display

he temperature gauge indicates that the oil in

gine revs should be reduced if the pointer goes

row-. The needle must then return to the normal

d zone, switch off the engine and check the

is correct and the oil pressure warning lamp

he engine is started, you can drive on to the

o not run the engine at high speeds.

Fig. 47 Engine oil temperature gauge

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 66 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Fuel gauge

The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 70 litres.

When the needle reaches the reserve zone fig. 46 -arrow-, the warning

lamp lights up in the display. The text6) PLEASE REFUEL may appear in the

combi-instrument display. At the same time, an audible warning is given as a reminder to fill up. At this point there are still about 8 litres of fuel in the

tank.

Engine oil temperature

Do not drive at full throttle if t

the engine is still cold. The en

into the red area fig. 47 -ar

zone.

If the pointer remains in the re

engine oil level. If the oil level

does not start flashing when t

nearest qualified dealer, but d

6) Depending on model version

Fig. 46 Instrument panel: fuel gauge

Overview 67

Safety Fir Technical Data

e voltage drops below 12 volts when the engine

he power supply (battery and alternator)

rship.

8 volts while the engine is being started.

y

ither on the mileage display page 64, fig. 44

ombi-instrument page 64, fig. 44 .

pear in the odometer if a service is due soon. A

in the display along with the miles and the

e next service. The service message will disap-

ds after the ignition is switched on or if the

ext scheduled service is reduced in increments

t displayed in the instrument panel display:

IN... DAYS. The service message will disappear

ter the ignition is switched on or the engine is

an be resumed by pressing the reset button on

the rocker switch of the windscreen wiper lever

nal will sound and the flashing spanner

ximately 20 seconds. The following information

ent panel display: SERVICE NOW.

A3

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 67 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Setting the clock

The setting knob is located beneath the rev counter.

Setting the hour

Turn the setting knob page 64, fig. 44 briefly in an anti-

clockwise direction to move the hour forward by one hour or

turn and hold the setting knob in an anti-clockwise direction to

move the hour forward more quickly.

Setting the minutes

Turn the setting knob briefly in a clockwise direction to set the

clock forward by one minute or

Turn and hold the setting knob in a clockwise direction to set the

minutes forward more quickly.

Mileage display

The top counter of the mileage display page 64, fig. 44 registers the

total mileage covered by the vehicle.

The lower counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates steps

of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by the reset button

page 64, fig. 44 .

Voltmeter

The voltmeter page 64, fig. 44 indicates the voltage of the vehicle elec-

trical system. The voltage of the electrical system should normally be

between 12 and 15 volts. If th

is running, you should have t

checked by a qualified deale

Note The voltage may drop below

Service Interval Displa

The service display is shown e

or in the display7) in the c

Service warning

A service pre-warning will ap

spanner symbol appears

number of kilometres until th

pear approximately 20 secon

engine is running.

The distance quoted to the n

of 100 miles.

The following information tex

SERVICE IN... KM OR SERVICE approximately 20 seconds af

running. The normal display c

the trip counter or by pressing

.

If a service is due, a gong sig

symbol will appear for appro

text displayed in the instrum

A8

A10

A9

A11 7) Optional equipment

A10

AB

Overview68

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 68 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by

pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.

An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day

information.

Resetting the service display

The display is reset by the SEAT dealer after the service has been carried out.

You will receive a print-out from the SEAT dealership as confirmation that this

work has been carried out.

If the service is not carried out by a SEAT Service centre, the service interval

display will have to be reset manually as follows:

Switch off ignition.

Press and hold the reset knob for the trip meter.

Turn the ignition on and turn the reset button to the right. The display will

return to the normal mode.

Note The next service will be displayed after 15,000 km (10,000 miles) if you

reset the service display yourself. The service interval will not be determined

individually.

Do not reset the display between service intervals as the display will

otherwise be incorrect.

Overview 69

Safety Fir Technical Data

g on the exact nature of the functional problem,

e given.

ends on the type of combi-instrument you have

ombi-instrument does not have an integrated

ssages given on a fault, you will receive informa-

res or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.

fter a fault has been corrected, you should stop

ch off the engine and seek professional advice.

Action

off and check the brake fluid level

off and seek professional help page 181

ge 218

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 69 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Display in the instrument panel

Fault messages

Faults are shown by warning lamps and / or as symbols with

warning and information reports on the display.

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-

tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional problems are

shown by warning lamps and / or red or yellow symbols with fault texts on the

combi-instrument. Dependin

audible warnings may also b

Note The size of the display dep

fitted. In some models, the c

display.

In addition to warning me

tion in the display on procedu

Overview of selected fault messages

Fault messages are displayed on the combi-instrument display.

The following overview does not show all fault messages. Not all fault

messages are displayed with a symbol.

Warning symbols (priority 1)

If the symbol lights up again a

the vehicle immediately, swit

Fault message Symbol

STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL Stop the car, turn the engine

page 223.

HANDBRAKE ON Release the handbrake.

STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL

and

Stop the car, turn the engine

STOP CHECK COOLANT SERVICE MANUAL Checking coolant level pa

Overview70

off and check the brake fluid level

workshop as soon as possible and have the

; and make sure your passengers are also

.

Action

with the right engine oil. page 216

sed Service Centre as soon as possible and

workshop as soon as possible and have the

fluid.

workshop immediately and have the brake

sed Service Centre as soon as possible and

sed Service Centre as soon as possible and

workshop immediately and have the airbag

Action

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 70 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Information symbols (priority 2)

STOP OIL PRESSURE ENGINE OFF SERVICE MANUAL Stop the car, turn the engine

page 216.

ALTERNATOR WORKSHOP! Take the vehicle to a qualified

alternator checked.

FASTEN SEATBELT Fasten your seat belt correctly

properly belted in page 18

Fault message Symbol

CHECK OIL LEVEL Check the oil level and top up

OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP Take the vehicle to an Authori

have the engine checked.

STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL Take the vehicle to a qualified

ABS checked.

PLEASE REFUEL Refuel as soon as possible.

TOP UP WASHER FLUID Fill up with water and washer

CHECK BRAKE PADS Take the vehicle to a qualified

pads checked.

EXHAUST WORKSHOP Take the vehicle to an Authori

have the engine checked.

ENGINE FAULT CONSULT WORKSHOP or

Take the vehicle to an Authori

have the engine checked.

AIRBAG FAULT Take the vehicle to a qualified

system checked.

Fault message Symbol

Overview 71

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 71 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Fault message priorities

Priority 1 fault messages (red)

If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will

be accompanied by three audible warnings . This is a danger warning.

Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain

professional assistance if necessary.

If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be

displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. The symbols will

keep flashing until the faults have been rectified.

No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning

report.

Priority 2 fault messages (yellow):

If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied

by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.

If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the

symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time.

Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning

reports have been dealt with!

WARNING

Failure to observe fault texts and warning lamps can result in serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

Overview72

Further information

page 34

page 74

page 75

page 75

page 75

. 48 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of items of equipment listed here are fitted only on tain models/model years or are optional extras.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 72 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Warning lamps

Overview of the warning lamps

The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.

Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps

Airbag

Trailer turn signals*

Cruise control

Operate the foot brake

Rear fog light

Fig the cer

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

Overview 73

Safety Fir Technical Data

nt (die- page 75

page 75

page 75

page 75

page 76

page 76

page 76

page 76

page 77

page 78

page 78

page 18

page 78

page 78

Further information

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 73 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

If lit: preheating system active.

If flashing: there is a fault in the engine manageme

sel engines). Contact a specialist workshop.

Turn signals

Engine fault (petrol engine)

Main beam headlights

Fault in the emission control system

Traction control system TCS

Electronic Stabilising Program* (ESP)

Anti-lock brake system ABS

Diesel particulate filter

Brakes/Handbrake

Alternator

Seat belt warning lamp*

Fuel reserve

Fault in lights*

Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

Overview74

r information texts in the display, the appro-

will light up and a warning or information text

.

flashes when the turn signals are

caravan or trailer.

when the turn signals are operated, provided a

d connected to the vehicle.

h if one of the turn signals on the trailer fails.

page 79

page 79

page 79

page 79

page 79

page 80

Further information

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 74 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

WARNING

Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle so that it does not represent a danger.

The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compart- ment, you must switch off the engine and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 211.

Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without

warning or information texts in the display.

In vehicles with warning o

priate warning lamp for a fault

will also appear in the display

Trailer turn signals

This warning lamp also

operated while towing a

The warning lamp flashes

trailer is correctly attached an

The warning lamp will not flas

Tailgate open display*

Windscreen washer fluid*

Door open display*

Brake pad wear indicator*

Engine oil level/pressure*

Coolant temperature/level gauge

Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

Overview 75

Safety Fir Technical Data

es when the turn signals are in oper-

nal is operated, either the left or right indi-

ing lamps will flash at the same time when the

itched on.

rning lamp will start flashing twice as fast.

rn signals page 112.

itors the engine management system

onic Power Control) lights up when the ignition

he lamp is working properly. It should go out

running.

ronic engine management system while you are

ll light up. Take the vehicle to an Authorised

ssible and have the engine checked.

ts up when the main beams are on.

p when the main beams are on or when the

.

12.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 75 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Cruise control system*

The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system

is switched on.

The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on.

For further notes on the cruise control system see

Operating the foot brake

The footbrake must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is

necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the

positions P or N.

Rear fog light

This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further

information page 109.

Faults in diesel engines

This indicator monitors the engine management system for

diesel engines.

If a malfunction occurs in the engine management system while you are

driving, the control lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to an Authorised

Service Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

At the same time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on

the instrument panel.

Turn signals

The warning lamp flash

ation.

Depending on which turn sig

cator lamp flashes. Both warn

hazard warning lights are sw

If one turn signal fails, the wa

Further information on the tu

Engine management

This warning lamp mon

for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electr

is switched on to show that t

when the engine has started

If a fault develops in the elect

driving, this warning lamp wi

Service Centre as soon as po

Main beam headlights

This warning lamp ligh

The warning lamp lights u

headlight flasher is operated

Further information page 1

Overview76

programme (ESP)*

itors the electronic stabilisation

ABS, EDL and TCS.

following functions:

onds when the ignition is switched on while a

ut.

activated when driving.

y if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

y if the ESP is switched off.

lt should occur in the ABS because the ESP

he ABS.

hts up and stays on after the engine is started,

l system has temporarily switched off the ESP.

ctivated by switching the ignition off and then

goes out, this means the system is fully

(ABS)

monitors the ABS.

ight up for a few seconds when the ignition is

after the system has run through an automatic

not light up when the ignition is switched on.

t go out again after a few seconds.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 76 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Fault in the exhaust system*

Exhaust gas indicator

If the indicator flashes it signals possible damage to the catalytic

converter caused by defective combustion. Reduce speed immediately and

go to the nearest specialised workshop to check the engine. At the same

time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on the instru-

ment panel.

If the indicator lights up, a fault has developed during driving which has

affects the quality of the exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed

immediately and go to the nearest specialised workshop to check the engine.

At the same time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on

the instrument panel.

Traction control system (TCS)*

The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from

spinning when the vehicle is accelerating

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn

out after about 2 seconds.

When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the

system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will

remain lit.

It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-

ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information see page 183.

Electronic stabilisation

This warning lamp mon

programme.

This programme includes the

The warning lamp has the

It will light for about 2 sec

test of the function is carried o

It flashes when the ESP is

It will light up continuousl

It will light up continuousl

It will also come on if a fau

operates in conjunction with t

If the ESP warning lamp lig

this may mean that the contro

In this case the ESP can be rea

on again. If the warning lamp

functional.

Anti-lock brake system

A warning lamp system

The warning lamp should l

switched on. It goes out again

test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The warning lamp does

The warning lamp does no

Overview 77

Safety Fir Technical Data

EDL)*

the ABS in vehicles equipped with an

Program (ESP)*

dicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please

workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-

84.

indicator lamp*

on the instrument panel it signals that the filter

f frequent short journeys. To clean the filter of

constant speed of 60 km/h for 15 minutes.

it. The most efficient way to clean the diesel

4th or 5th gear, at approximately 2,000 rpm.

ture increase sufficient to burn the soot in the

rwards, go to a specialised workshop to

blockage signal) fuel consumption increases

er in some cases.

age or the necessary operations may appear on

peed of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic suggested by the warning lights should not way code.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 77 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.

The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control

function will not function). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as

soon as possible. For further information on the ABS see the page 182.

If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp

, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault

in the brake system .

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 211, Working in the engine compartment.

If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir page 223, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault corrected.

Differential lock fault (

EDL operates along with

Electronic Stabilisation

A malfunction in the EDL is in

take the vehicle to a qualified

mation on the EDL page 1

Diesel particulate filter

When the indicator lights

is blocked by soot because o

these particulates, drive at a

Always respect the speed lim

particulate filter is to drive in

. This causes a tempera

filter.

If the lamp remains lit afte

examine the problem.

While the lamp is lit (filter

and the engine may lose pow

At the same time, a text mess

the instrument panel.

WARNING

Try to always adapt the s conditions. The indications lead you to disobey the high

Overview78

up while driving, the alternator is no longer

ld immediately drive to the nearest qualified

cal equipment that is not absolutely necessary

ttery.

tage is insufficient for normal vehicle

indicate that the fuel tank is down to

f fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest

up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-

.

when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting

defective.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 78 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Brake system* / handbrake

The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the

brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake

system.

This warning lamp lights up if

If the handbrake is on

If the brake fluid level is too low

If there is a fault in the brake system

This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system

warning lamp.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on

If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault corrected.

Alternator

This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go

out when the engine has started running.

If the warning lamp lights

charging the battery. You shou

workshop.

You should avoid using electri

because this will drain the ba

If the indicator flashes the vol

operation.

Fuel level / reserve

This symbol lights up to

the reserve level.

This lights when only 7 litres o

warning is given. This serves

opportunity.

Bulb defect

The warning lamp lights

rior lighting is defective

The warning lamp lights up

(e.g. left-hand main beam) is

Overview 79

Safety Fir Technical Data

ates that the engine oil pressure is too

e does not operate correctly.

oil pressure too low)

or starts to flash in red while driving, a sound

ree times when the engine speed exceeds 1500

engine: check the oil level and replace if neces-

ven though the oil level is correct, do not

hould not be turning even at idle speed. Obtain

eed falls to below idling speed, the oil pressure

ncrease the engine speed by accelerating or

evel* too low)

in yellow, this indicates that the oil level is too

oil level, replacing where necessary.

he oil level warning will fall to zero. But if it is not

come back on after approximately 100 km.

level*)

und signal is emitted and the warning light

appears briefly on the on board computer

immediately be checked by a Technical Service

appears until the engine is checked, the level of

itored, preferably every time the vehicle is

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 79 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Tailgate open display*

When the ignition is switched on, the warning light indicates that the tailgate

is open.

The warning light only goes off when the tailgate is completely closed.

Washer fluid

This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen

washer level is too low.

This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity

page 220.

Door open display*

This light comes on when a door is open or incorrectly closed.

Brake pad wear indicator*

As the brake pad wear indicator only monitors the front brake pads, it is advis-

able to have the rear brake pads inspected at the same time.

WARNING

Have the brake pads inspected immediately by a qualified dealership if the warning display lights up.

Engine oil pressure

The warning light indic

low or that the oil gaug

It lights up or flashes in red (

If the warning light lights up

signal will also be emitted th

rpm. Stop and switch off the

sary page 216.

If the warning light flashes e

continue driving The engine s

technical assistance.

If, while driving, the engine sp

warning light may come on. I

dropping to a lower gear.

A yellow light comes on (oil l

If the warning light comes on

low. Switch off engine, check

When the bonnet is opened t

topped with oil, the light will

Yellow flashing (defective oil

If the oil gauge is faulty, a so

flashes several times.

At the same time, a warning

display*. The engine should

Centre.

From the moment the defect

oil should be constantly mon

refuelled.

Overview80

you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping t. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no team or coolant.

of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! in the engine compartment, switch off the wn. Always note the corresponding warnings.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 80 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Coolant Level* / temperature

The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too

high or if the coolant level is too low.

There is a fault if:

The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.

The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while

three acoustic warning signals are emitted.

This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature

is too high.

Coolant temperature too high

First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too

high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction

of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-

sary page 243.

If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Contact an Authorised Service Centre

or a qualified workshop.

Coolant level too low

The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display:

First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal

range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .

WARNING

If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn off the engine, turn on the hazard lights and place the warning triangle.

Never open the bonnet if from the engine compartmen longer see or hear escaping s

The engine compartment Before carrying out any work engine and allow it to cool do page 211

WARNING (continued)

Overview 81

Safety Fir Technical Data

lti-function indicator and on board computer is

functions and indications of the multi-function

chapter Intruments.

on, the on-board computer continually controls

s and vehicle components while the vehicle is

ent repairs or services are indicated by sound

red or yellow,depending on priority, on the

low symbols, text messages appear on the

version or the country, it is possible that the

ehicle does not display certain messages, or

those in this manual. For this reason, we advise

minous Indicators for complementary informa-

and a description of their function.

ox

dicated after the ignition is switched on. The

is emitted at the same time.

earbox

on with the lever in position P or N, the driver

lay:

S BRAKE TO SELECT GEAR

tc) the warning is erased.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 81 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

On board computer with multifunction display

Description

The information from the mu

shown on these displays. The

indicator are described in the

When the ignition is switched

the working of certain system

in motion.

Faults in the operation or urg

signals and light warnings in

instrument panel.

In addition to the red and yel

driver's display.

Note Depending on the model

equipment installed in your v

they do not correspond with

you to consult the chapter Lu

tion on the different symbols

Check operation

Vehicles with a manual gearb

If faults exist, these will be in

corresponding sound signal

Vehicles with an automatic g

Once the ignition is switched

warning appears on the disp

WITH CAR STOPPED, DEPRES

After selecting a gear (R, D, e

Fig. 49 Vehicle instru- ment panel display with telematic or navigation system.

Fig. 50 Display in vehicle with on-board computer.

Overview82

while driving, stop and switch off the engine

el and replace if necessary.

ng, even though the oil level is correct, do not

hould not turn over even at idling speed, tech-

:

vel of brake fluid is too low. Stop the vehicle

vel of the brake fluid

systems

:

es while the ABS warning light is lit up, this

is faulty and that the behaviour of the normal

d.

nction with the ABS. If the EDS stops working,

n. When the ASR and the ESP fail this light also

l Service Centre as soon as possible.

:

lights up when the handbrake is applied with

t when the handbrake is released. If it does not

ke system.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 82 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Where one or more faults exist, the warning disappears some 15 seconds

after the engine is started, and the corresponding fault symbols with their

respective text messages appear on the display.

For all vehicles

A sound signal is emitted in the event of a fault:

Priority 1 - three buzzes

Priority 2 - one buzz

If priority 1 and 2 faults occur at the same time, three buzzes are emitted.

In the event of a fault, the symbol with the corresponding text message is

displayed.

Note Priority 2 faults are displayed after repairing or eliminating priority 1 faults.

Priority 1 (red symbols)

Priority 1 symbols warn of a dangerous situation. Therefore

the engine should be stopped and switched off.

Where various priority 1 faults exist, the symbols appear one by one for

approx 2 seconds The symbols will keep flashing until the faults have been

rectified.

The following priority 1 warnings or faults may appear:

Engine oil pressure

The corresponding warning is:

STOP PRES. OIL

STOP ENGINE!

If this symbol begins to flash

immediately. Check the oil lev

If the symbol continues flashi

continue driving. The engine s

nical assistance is necessary.

Brake system

The corresponding warning is

STOP BRAKE FLUID

SERVICE MANUAL.

This symbol lights up if the le

immediately and check the le

2. ABS, EDL*, TCS* and ESP*

The corresponding warning is

STOP BRAKES FAULTY

SERVICE MANUAL.

If the brake warning light flash

indicates that the ABS system

brake system may be damage

The EDS system works in conju

the ABS warning lamp comes o

comes on. Consult a Technica

3. Handbrake

The corresponding warning is

HANDBRAKE ON

The handbrake warning lamp

the ignition on It should go ou

this indicates a fault in the bra

Overview 83

Safety Fir Technical Data

even though the belt is neither loose nor

to continue driving to the nearest Technical

charge, it is advisable to switch off all non-vital

s:

me countries) lights up for approximately 6

switched on to remind occupants to fasten seat-

t fastened, a sound signal is emitted when the

will stop when the seat belts are fastened or

s.

below the MIN mark, you should wait for personnel before continuing to drive.

t, the fault may lie in the ABS. If the ABS control s may block rapidly on braking. This, in certain the vehicle to skid.

f you see steam or coolant escaping from the f burns. Wait until you can no longer see or

lant.

it could suddenly start to operate, even if the

iling coolant, the following should be

the coolant expansion tank!. When the engine s pressurised! Therefore wait until the engine p.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 83 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

An audible signal is also given if the car is driven faster than 6 km/h (approx.

4 mph) with the handbrake applied.

Coolant temperature/level gauge

The corresponding warning is:

STOP CHECK LEVEL COOLANT

SERVICE MANUAL.

If the symbol flashes while driving, this means that either the coolant temper-

ature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Stop immediately, switch off

the engine and check the level. Top up coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction

of the radiator fan. In this case, check the radiator fan fuse, and replace if

necessary.

If the warning light does not go out, although the coolant level is correct and

the fan fuse is correct, do not continue driving. Obtain technical assistance.

If the fault is only in the radiator fan, it is possible to continue driving as far

as the nearest Technical Service Centre, as long as the coolant level is correct

and the display light is off.

Alternator

The corresponding warning is:

ALTERNATOR WORKSHOP!

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go out

when the engine is started.

The alternator is operated by a long-lasting drive belt.

If the warning light lights up while driving, stop, switch off the engine and

check the drive belt. If the belt is loose or broken, do not continue driving, as

the coolant pump will not be driven. The belt should be checked or replaced.

If the warning light comes on

broken, it is usually possible

Service Centre.

As the vehicle battery will dis

electrical consumers.

Seat belt warning lamp

The corresponding warning i

FASTEN SEAT BELT

This warning light (only in so

seconds when the ignition is

belts. If the seat belts are no

ignition is switched on which

after approximately 6 second

WARNING

If the brake fluid level is assistance from specialised

If the fluid level is correc system fails, the rear wheel circumstances, could cause

Never open the bonnet i engine compartment. Risk o hear escaping steam or coo

Do not touch the fan, as ignition is switched off.

To prevent burns from bo observed:

Take care when opening is warm or hot, the system i cools before opening the ca

Overview84

:

engine arises while driving, the corresponding

ne) or flash (diesel engine). In this case the

mediately by a Technical Service Centre.

:

own in the following manner:

s on separately, it is possible to brake the

e system (without ABS). Consult a Technical

sible.

:

on, the vehicle key data is automatically

ill flash to confirm that the data is being

, the warning light will flash constantly. It will

hicle.

*

:

tes that the tailgate is open.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 84 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

To protect your face, hands and arms from hot steam or fluid, cover the fan cap with a large cloth in order to open it.

Take care to avoid coolant spilling on the exhaust pipe or any other hot component as antifreeze is inflammable.

Priority 2 (yellow symbols)

If a yellow symbol appears, a sound signal is emitted. The symbols indicate

a dangerous situation. The function shown should be controlled as fast as

possible. If various faults occur at the same time, the symbols will be

displayed one by one for approx. 2 seconds.

Oil level too low

The corresponding warning is:

CHECK LEVEL OIL

If the symbol lights up: stop, switch off the engine and check the oil level,

topping up where necessary.

Oil level too low

The corresponding warning is:

OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP!

If the symbol flashes this probably means that the oil level sensor is defec-

tive. The vehicle should immediately be taken to a Technical Service Centre.

It is possible to continue driving, but the oil level should be continually moni-

tored, e.g. every time the vehicle is refuelled.

Engine fault

- Petrol engine

- Diesel engine

The corresponding warning is

ENGINE FAULT WORKSHOP!

If a fault in the running of the

light will come on (petrol engi

engine should be checked im

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The corresponding warning is

ABS FAULT

A fault in the ABS system is sh

If the ABS warning light come

vehicle using the normal brak

Service Centre as soon as pos

Electronic immobiliser

The corresponding warning is

IMMOBILIS.ACTIVE

When the ignition is switched

consulted. The warning light w

checked

If an unauthorised key is used

not be possible to start the ve

Tailgate/bonnet open display

The corresponding warning is

TAILGATE OPEN

This warning light only indica

WARNING (continued)

Overview 85

Safety Fir Technical Data

n system it is possible to go from one display to

the windscreen wiper lever ( by holding it

):

or the multifunction display are activated, the

played on the on-board computer screen.

SEAT navigation system are included in a sepa-

Fig. 52 On-board computer display:

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 85 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

The warning light only goes off when the tailgate is completely closed ( to the

second position)

Windscreen washer*

The corresponding warning is:

TOP UP WASHER FLUID

This symbol lights up to indicate that the windscreen washer level is too low.

Top up windscreen and headlight washer fluid*

Fuel level low

The corresponding warning is:

PLEASE REFUEL

Navigation system * If the vehicle has a navigatio

the other using the button on

pressed in for over 2 seconds

Navigation display

Multifunction display

When the navigation display

possible faults are mainly dis

Instructions for the use of the

rate handbook.

Fig. 51 Button on the windscreen washer lever:

Overview86

steering wheel.

control8) for the radio unit.

ise the volume of the radio.

wer the volume of the radio.

functions:

search, forwards (radio), listening to TIM

h oldest (radio / navigation), fast forward

track (CD mode).

. 53 Multi-function steering wheel with controls

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 86 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Steering wheel controls

Multifunction steering wheel*

These controls enable you to perform various functions without taking your hands off the

The controls on the multi-function steering wheel fig. 53 only work when

the ignition is switched on.

Rocker switch for the cruise control system (CCS):

By briefly pressing the button the programmed speed is recov-

ered.

If the button is held down the speed increases. The speed of the

vehicle at the moment the button is released will be stored.

By briefly pressing the button the actual speed is stored.

If the button is held down the speed decreases. The speed of the

vehicle at the moment the button is released will be stored.

Button for switching off CCS temporarily. The target speed remains

stored. Further information.

Rocker switch for volume

Press button to ra

Press button to lo

Rocker switch for various

Button for: station

messages, starting wit

(cassette mode), next

Fig

A1

-

-

A2 8) Only for factory-fitted radio.

A3

A4

Overview 87

Safety Fir Technical Data

, either take the mobile telephone with you or

eptance off as incoming calls will be passed on

off.

ion*

consists of:

of the drinks holder),

er switch in the radio system to relay telephone

the dash panel,

al.

together with the vehicle system, a mobile tele-

dash panel is also required. Next, the mobile

ve to be connected to the dash panel telephone

s use, please contact your SEAT Dealer.

ity

s under its sole responsibility that the product

ns in 1995/5/EC of the European Union Council.

onformity can be requested from the Customer

rand.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 87 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Button for: station search, backwards (radio), listening to TIM

messages, starting with latest (radio / navigation), fast rewind

(cassette mode), last track (CD mode).

Pushbutton for switching lighting on and off on the controls on the multi-

function steering wheel (on the side of the steering wheel).

Note The cruise control system is switched on and off using the button on the turn-

signal / main beam lever.

Telephone*

Handsfree system for mobile telephones*

Using the hands-free unit you can telephone without having to hold the

mobile telephone in your hand.

The voice of the person you are talking to will be relayed via the loudspeakers

of the radio system. You do not have to do anything in particular to respond -

simply behave as if you were talking to the front seat passenger.

The microphone is located on the left-hand side of the drink holder.

The required volume for the conversation can be set via the radio controls.

Note Please note that you will be able to hold a phone conversation through the

handsfree system only when the key is in the ignition. If the key is removed,

the conversation will only be possible through the telephone, since the

handsfree system is disconnected.

When leaving the vehicle

switch the automatic call acc

even if the radio is switched

Telephone preinstallat

The telephone preinstallation

a microphone (on the left

an interface box,

the automatic loudspeak

conversations,

a support incorporated in

and a telephone roof aeri

In order to use the telephone

phone holder adapted to the

telephone holder will then ha

console.

For any queries concerning it

Declaration of conform

NOKIA CORPORATION declare

HT-1 conforms to the provisio

A copy of the Declaration of C

Service Department for this b

A5

Unlocking and locking88

a safe place.

the vehicle.

give the plastic key tab to the new owner.

, take your key tab to an Authorised Service

can result in critical injuries.

sabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- o leave the vehicle or look after themselves.

could mean that the engine is started or that (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The e remote control key. This could result in vehicle in an emergency.

hicle keys in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of jury, damage or theft. Always take the key

vehicle.

m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk could engage suddenly, and you would not be

nts in the key and remote control. Protect the

sive vibration.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 88 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Unlocking and locking

Keys

Key set

The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a

remote control and a key tab with the number of the key.

The key set belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:

one remote control key fig. 54 with folding key bit*,

one key with a remote control ,

one key tab with the key number.

Plastic key tab

Spare keys cannot be issued without the key number on the key tab fig. 54

. Therefore:

Always keep the key tab in

Never leave the key tab in

If you sell the vehicle, please

Duplicate keys

If you need a replacement key

Centre.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the keys

Never leave children or di gency they may not be able t

Unsupervised use of a key electrical equipment is used doors can be locked using th people being trapped in the

Never leave any of the ve your vehicle could result in in with you when you leave the

Never remove the key fro of accident. The steering lock able to steer the vehicle.

Caution There are electronic compone

keys from moisture and exces

Fig. 54 Set of keys

AA

AB

AC

AB

Unlocking and locking 89

Safety Fir Technical Data

n fig. 56. This unfolds with a spring

on and push key down until it clicks into

ral locking system

em enables you to lock and unlock all

ate from one point.

ted using any of the following options:

in the driver door page 88,

Fig. 56 Folding key

AA

AA

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 89 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Remote control keys*

Two keys are supplied in vehicles with remote control, a folding key and a

fixed key fig. 55.

Note In certain versions of the model, the remote control key may be folding. The

key works, in terms of remote control, in the same way as other remote control

keys page 95.

Folding key*

To unfold key bit, press butto

action.

To fold the key bit, press butt

place.

Central locking

Description of the cent

The central locking syst

the doors and the tailg

Central locking can be opera

mechanically with the key

Fig. 55 Remote control keys

Unlocking and locking90

e doors with the key

k on the driver door.

position. The doors and the tailgate are

k on the driver door.

o the locking position . The doors

ked.

ish to unlock your vehicle manually using the

the interior monitoring system10) and the anti-

ted immediately. The deactivation is confirmed

iefly twice.

urtesy position will be switched on for approx-

vehicle is unlocked.

locking position, all windows (apart from the

will be opened on vehicles equipped with elec-

ish to lock your vehicle manually using the key:

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 90 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

the key with remote control 9) page 95,

with the central locking button page 92.

Individual opening of doors9)

An Authorised SEAT Service Centre can programme the individual opening of

doors.

When the key is turned once in the driver's door lock, in the direction of

opening, or when button page 95, fig. 61 on the remote control key is

pressed, only the driver's door will unlock.

When the key is turned a second time or the button is pressed a second

time, all the doors and the tailgate are unlocked.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone in the car if it has been locked from the outside. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency. People could become trapped inside in an emergency.

Never close the doors without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the door.

Note The entire vehicle is unlocked if the airbags are triggered during an accident.

The vehicle cannot be locked from the inside unless the ignition is first

switched off and back on. Following an accident, the vehicle cannot be locked

from the outside. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

Opening and closing th

Opening the doors

Insert the key in the loc

Turn the key to the open

unlocked.

Closing the doors

Insert the key in the loc

First turn the key once t

and the tailgate are loc

Notes on unlocking

The following applies if you w

key:

The deadlock mechanism,

theft alarm10) will be deactiva

by the turn signals flashing br

The interior lights in the co

imately 20 seconds when the

If the key is held in the un

electric vent wing at the rear)

tric windows.

Notes on locking

The following applies if you w

9) Optional equipment

A1

10) Optional equipment

Unlocking and locking 91

Safety Fir Technical Data

ed using the remote control key. This could apped in the vehicle in an emergency.

ith you when you leave the vehicle.

m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk k could engage suddenly, and you would not be

omponents. Protect the keys from moisture and

n programme the central locking system so that

cked when the key is turned once to open.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 91 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

The deadlock mechanism, the interior monitoring system10) and the anti-

theft alarm10) will be activated immediately if the key is turned once in the

lock. The activation is confirmed by the turn signals flashing briefly.

The deadlock mechanism, the interior monitoring system and the anti-

theft alarm will not be activated if the key is turned in the lock twice within

one second. All the doors and the tailgate will, however, be locked. The doors

can be unlocked from the inside if the deadlock mechanism has not been

activated. To do this, operate the door opening lever on the door in question.

The alarm will go off.

When locking the vehicle, the interior lights in the courtesy switch posi-

tion will be switched off.

A warning lamp in the driver door flashes to indicate the deadlock is

working. The warning lamp will switch off after 14 days. This is to prevent the

vehicle battery from discharging completely when the vehicle is not used for

a longer period. The system is still active.

Windows, or the sliding roof, which are still open can be closed automat-

ically on vehicles equipped with electric windows and electric vent windows

or with an electric sliding roof. To do this, the key must be kept held in the

locking position until all windows and the sliding roof are fully closed.

WARNING

If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped inside.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.

Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse of the keys, for example, by children, may result in serious damage and accident.

The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.

If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti- vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.

The doors can be lock result in people being tr

Always take the key w

Never remove the key fro of accident. The steering loc able to steer the vehicle.

Caution Each key contains electronic c

excessive vibration.

Note Any SEAT Service centre ca

only the driver's door is unlo

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking92

n you use the central locking button to lock your

and the anti-theft alarm11) are not activated

d.

en the doors or the tailgate from the outside

r instance when stopped at traffic lights).

ed if it is open. This prevents you from locking

rs separately from inside the car. You will have

nce. The door will be opened by pulling the

ren and disabled people may be trapped

sabled people alone in the car. The doors will cking button is activated. Vehicle occupants

vehicle. In the event of an accident they would ocked doors could make it more difficult to e event of an accident.

m makes it more difficult to break into

door release lever and the central

ctive.

driver's door lock to lock or

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 92 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Central locking buttons

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from the inside using

the central locking button in the driver door.

Locking the vehicle

Press button fig. 57 .

Unlocking the vehicle

Press button .

The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

Neither the deadlock mechanism nor the antitheft alarm can be activated or

deactivated via the central locking button11). The central locking button will

not function when the deadlock is activated.

Please note the following whe

vehicle:

The deadlock mechanism

when the button is presse

It will not be possible to op

(this may offer extra safety, fo

The driver door is not lock

yourself out of the vehicle.

You can unlock all the doo

to pull the door release lever o

door release lever again.

WARNING

If the vehicle is locked, child inside.

Never leave children or di be locked when the central lo could become trapped in the not be able to reach safety. L assist vehicle occupants in th

Deadlock

The deadlock mechanis

the vehicle because the

locking button are not a

Activating deadlock

Turn the key once in the 11) Optional equipment

Fig. 57 Detail of driver door: central locking system button

AA

AB

Unlocking and locking 93

Safety Fir Technical Data

n also be locked and unlocked centrally by oper-

e lever. Press or pull lever fig. 58. In this case

. The door release lever for the front passenger

no influence on the other safety areas. When

ll only lock and unlock their own areas.

not be locked using the door release lever. This

urself out of the vehicle.

l be activated if the vehicle is locked from the

radio remote control. The doors can then no

side or the outside. The deadlock mechanism

is switched on. The doors can be opened using

push the door release lever in and then pull it

Fig. 58 Driver's door release lever in normal position

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 93 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

press once the locking button on the remote control12). A red

warning lamp in the driver door flashes to indicate the deadlock

is working.

Deactivating deadlock when the vehicle is locked

Turn the key twice in the driver's door lock to lock or

press twice the locking button on the remote control12). The

vehicle is locked without activating the deadlock.

The doors can be unlocked from the inside if the deadlock mechanism has not

been activated. You will have to pull the door release lever once. The door will

be opened by pulling the door release lever again. When the deadlock is

deactivated, the anti-theft alarm 12) page 97 and the interior monitoring

system are also deactivated12).

WARNING

Nobody should remain in the vehicle if the deadlock mechanism has been activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency. People could become trapped inside in an emergency.

Door release lever

The doors and the tailgate ca

ating the driver's door releas

the deadlock is not activated

door and the rear doors have

used, these release levers wi

The opened driver's door can

prevents you from locking yo

Note The deadlock mechanism wil

inside by accident using the

longer be opened from the in

will be released if the ignition

the door release levers. First

out.

12) Optional equipment

Unlocking and locking94

vated to prevent children opening the doors by

lock is activated, the door can be opened from

of lock can be activated and deactivated using

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 94 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Childproof locks

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened

from the inside.

Activating the childproof lock

Unlock the car and open the door you wish to child-proof.

Move the lever using the vehicle key in the direction of the arrow

fig. 59.

Deactivating the childproof lock

Unlock the car and open the door on which you wish to deacti-

vate the child-proof lock.

Move the lever using the vehicle key in the opposite direction to

the arrow.

The childproof lock can be acti

accident. When the childproof

the outside only. The childpro

a key when the door is open.

Fig. 59 Release for the child lock in the rear left- hand door

Unlocking and locking 95

Safety Fir Technical Data

61 on remote control to unlock all the

remote control to lock all the doors and

is pressed, the battery indicator lamp on the key

n the control, the key shaft is released.

r and the batteries are integrated in the remote

interior of the vehicle. The remote control, when

a range of several metres around the car. Obsta-

rol and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and

siderably reduce the range of the remote control

Fig. 61 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key

A1

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 95 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Key with remote control

Unlocking and locking vehicle

The remote control key enables you to lock and unlock the

vehicle from a distance.

Unlocking the vehicle

Press button fig.

doors and tailgate.

Locking the vehicle

Press button on

tailgate.

When either of these buttons

fig. 61 lights up.

Using button fig. 61 o

The remote control transmitte

control. The receiver is in the

fitted with new batteries, has

cles between the remote cont

discharged batteries can con

page 96.

Fig. 60 Range of the remote control

A2

A4

A3

Unlocking and locking96

aining unlocked if the unlocking button is

or close the vehicle using the remote control,

d page 96 or change the battery page 96.

control may be momentarily affected if there is

veband (e.g. radiotelephone, mobile tele-

e vehicle.

te control key

control key

utton page 95, fig. 61 once.

vehicle using the key bit within one

pened and closed with the remote control if you

g. 61 a long way outside the effective range

ol. The remote control key will have to be resyn-

available from SEAT Service. They must be

.

can be used.

emote control page 95, fig. 61 does not

shed, the battery must be replaced.

A1

A1

A4

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 96 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

WARNING

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.

Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse of the keys, for example, by children, may result in serious damage and accident.

The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.

If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti- vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.

The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.

Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be able to steer the vehicle.

Note An Authorised SEAT Service Centre can programme the individual

opening of doors. In this case, when the unlock button on the remote

control is pressed once, only the driver's door is unlocked page 90. When

the button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.

Seat Service will be happy to provide more information on the activation of

this function.

The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the

remote control. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. Obstacles

between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and

discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.

The remote control only locks and unlocks the vehicle when it is used

within range.

The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of

the doors or the tailgate 30 seconds after unlocking the car. This function

prevents the vehicle from rem

pressed by mistake.

If it is not possible to open

this should be re-synchronise

The working of the remote

transmitter using the same wa

phone, etc) in the vicinity of th

Synchronising the remo

Synchronising the remote

Briefly press the open b

Then open or close the

minute page 90.

The vehicle can no longer be o

press button page 95, fi

of the radio wave remote contr

chronised.

Spare remote control keys are

matched to the locking system

Up to four remote control keys

Replacing the battery

If the battery indicator on the r

flash when the buttons are pu

Unlocking and locking 97

Safety Fir Technical Data

ystem

ft alarm system

gers an alarm if unauthorised move-

und the vehicle.

larm

ing the unlock button on the remote

nition.

nically (emergency opening)

nction fails, you will have to use the key to

done as follows:

Fig. 62 Interior moni- toring system sensor

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 97 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

We recommend having the batteries changed by a qualified workshop if

required.

Caution Use of inappropriate batteries may damage the remote control. For this

reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same size and

power.

For the sake of the environment The flat batteries must be disposed of in accordance with regulations

governing the protection of the environment.

Anti-theft alarm s

Description of anti-the

The anti-theft alarm trig

ments are detected aro

Activating the anti-theft a

Blocking the engine.

Deactivating the alarm

Unblock the vehicle us

control or switch on ig

Opening the doors mecha

If the remote control fu

unlock the car. This is

Unlocking and locking98

onitoring system are located at the top of the

nd rear door page 97, fig. 62 The sensors

will otherwise not be able to function properly.

hen the interior monitoring system is active as

riggered by a draft of air.

, access is gained to a second secured zone

er a door has been opened), the warning signal

s active even if the battery is disconnected or

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 98 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Press button page 95, fig. 61 to fold out the key bit.

Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-

theft alarm system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered

immediately.

Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. When the ignition is

switched on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid

vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. If you do

not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds, the alarm is trig-

gered.

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal

it. Audible and visible alarms13) are triggered if the car is opened using the

mechanical key, or if unauthorised access is gained to the vehicle.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried

out when the car is locked:

Opening of vehicle using mechanical key without switching on ignition

within the next 15 seconds

Opening a door

Opening the bonnet

Opening the tailgate

Switching on the ignition

Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring).

The acoustic signals sound and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.

Interior monitoring system

The sensors for the interior m

door post between the front a

must not be covered, as they

The windows must be closed w

the anti-theft alarm could be t

Note If, after the alarm goes off

(e.g. the tailgate is opened aft

is triggered again.

Vehicle monitoring remain

not working for any reason.

13) Optional equipment

A3

Unlocking and locking 99

Safety Fir Technical Data

er while the vehicle is stationary or when you

ilgate

e will be locked by turning the vehicle key to

e will be unlocked by turning the vehicle key to

oof, which are still open can be closed automat-

ed with electric windows and electric vent

ric sliding roof. To do this, the vehicle key must

fig. 63 until all windows and the sliding

ion , all windows (apart from the electric vent

vehicles equipped with electric windows.

ntral locking system or the servomotor lock is

anually by turning the vehicle key to position

tailgate

tailgate when the ignition is on. This helps

hts). This function will remain active for approx.

is switched off as long as no door is opened.

ailgate immediately unlocks.

possible to open the tailgate for up to 30

as been closed and the ignition is switched on.

AA

AB

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 99 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Tailgate

Opening the tailgate

Unlocking the tailgate

Make sure that the key slot is vertical.

Operate the handle and pull up the tailgate .

Closing the tailgate

Take hold of one of the recessed handles in the interior trim of the

tailgate.

Close the tailgate hard in Safety instructions for the tail-

gate on page 101.

A warning appears on the instrument panel14) if the tailgate is open or not

properly closed. Depending on the level of equipment fitted, an audible

warning14) will be given eith

drive.

Locking and unlocking the ta

The doors and the tailgat

position fig. 63 .

The doors and the tailgat

position .

Key slot positions

Windows, or the sliding r

ically on vehicles equipp

windows or with an elect

be kept held in position

roof are fully closed.

If the key is held in posit

wing) will be opened on

The tailgate can, if the ce

defective, be unlocked m

.

Convenience opening of the

It is not possible to open the

prevent theft (e.g. at traffic lig

30 seconds after the ignition

When a door is opened, the t

For greater convenience, it is

seconds after the last door h

Fig. 63 Key slot positions of tailgate lock

14) Optional equipment

AA

AB

AA

AB

AC

AC

Unlocking and locking100

, make sure that the key has not been left

the inside trim of the tailgate and

i-instrument if the tailgate is not properly

perly. Risk of accident or injury.

by pushing it down with your hand on the tter. Risk of injury!

ed after closing. If not, it may open unexpect-

lay in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle y high and low temperatures, depending on ause serious injuries/illness. It could even se and lock both the tailgate and all the other the vehicle.

ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and others. Make sure that no ate.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 100 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Driving with the tailgate open

If the tailgate is open or incorrectly closed, the following warning may be

appear on the display14). Please note that theft of your cargo is more likely if

the tailgate is open.

WARNING

If you have to drive with the tailgate open, please observe the following warnings:

Observe the following points to reduce the danger of poisoning from exhaust fumes entering the vehicle interior:

Close all windows.

Close the sliding/tilting roof,

Switch off air recirculation.

Open the air outlets in the dash panel,

Set the fresh air blower to the highest speed.

Drive particularly carefully and think ahead. If possible, avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres as this could cause the open tailgate to move unpredictably. Risk of injury.

When carrying objects that protrude from the boot, the correct signals should be used; otherwise there is a risk of accident. Observe legal require- ments when doing so.

Always secure objects in the boot. Loose items could fall out of the vehicle and injure other road users.

If a baggage rack is fitted on the tailgate, it should be removed before travelling with the tailgate open.

Read and always observe the safety information concerning the use of the tailgate page 101.

Closing the tailgate

Before closing the tailgate

inside the boot.

Closing the tailgate

Take hold of the grip in

pull the tailgate down.

Pull hard.

A display appears in the comb

closed15).

WARNING

Always close the tailgate pro

Do not close the tailgate window. The glass could sha

Ensure the tailgate is lock edly while driving.

Never allow children to p can be subjected to extremel the time of year. This could c have fatal consequences. Clo doors when you are not using

Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou one is in the path of the tailg

15) Optional equipment

Unlocking and locking 101

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 101 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Safety instructions for the tailgate

WARNING

For safety reasons, you should always keep the tailgate fully closed when driving. Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.

Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpect- edly while driving.

Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.

Loose objects which could fall out of the vehicle when the tailgate is opened could cause injury.

If you have objects (for example bicycles) on a rack fitted to the tailgate, you may not be able to open the tailgate fully, or the additional weight could close the tailgate. For this reason, you should support the tailgate or remove the objects from the rack. Risk of injury.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle. Make sure first that there is no one in the vehicle.

If you have to drive with the tailgate open, observe the all notes page 100 to reduce the risk, for example, of poisoning caused by exhaust fumes entering the passenger compartment.

Unlocking and locking102

ws for approx. 10 minutes after switching off

r door nor the front passenger door has been

or window with one-touch opening and closing

door window with one-touch opening and

tivating the electric window buttons in the rear

left door16)

right door16)

the driver door can be used to disable the elec-

r doors.

ttons on rear doors are activated.

s on rear doors are deactivated.

indows can result in injury.

ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and others. Make sure that no

w.

ey with you when you leave the vehicle.

isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if Misuse of the keys, for example, by children,

e and accident.

ntally be started and be out of control.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 102 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Windows

Opening and closing the windows electrically

All electric windows can be operated using the controls in the

driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own

window.

Opening and closing the windows

Press button fig. 64 , , or to open the corre-

sponding window.

Pull button to close a window .

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended

.

You can use the electric windo

the ignition if neither the drive

opened.

Buttons in the driver door

Button for the left front do

page 103

Button for the right front

closing page 103

Safety switch 16) for deac

doors

Button for window in rear

Button for window in rear

Safety switch

Safety switch fig. 64 in

tric window buttons in the rea

Safety switch not pressed: bu

Safety switch pressed: button

WARNING

Incorrect use of the electric w

Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou one is in the path of a windo

Always take the vehicle k

Never leave children or d they have access to the keys. may result in serious damag

The engine may accide

Fig. 64 Detail of driver door: buttons for front and rear electric windows

A1 A2 A4 A5

16) Optional equipment

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A3

Unlocking and locking 103

Safety Fir Technical Data

he window briefly to the second position.

ly.

for the window briefly to the second posi-

s fully.

ing and closing

and closing function is not active after

been disconnected or is empty and will

doors.

vehicle from outside and hold the key in

least one second. The one-touch function

tion.

o the first stage, the window will open (or close)

f you push or lift the button briefly to the second

one-touch opening) or close (one-touch closing)

the button while the window is opening or

on.

losing function will not function once the igni-

oll-back function will not work if there is a

ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 103 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti- vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.

The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.

Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened.

If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled.

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-

tion, the window will automatically open again page 104. If this happens,

check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it

again.

One-touch closing and opening

One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to

hold down the button.

The one-touch closing and opening of the electric windows can only

be controlled with the switches on the driver's door. The buttons

page 102, fig. 64 and have two levels for opening the

front windows and two for closing. This makes it easier to open or

close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing

Pull up the button for t

The window closes ful

One-touch opening

Push down the button

tion. The window open

Restoring one-touch open

The one-touch opening

the vehicle battery has

have to be reset.

Close all windows and

Use the key to lock the

the lock position for at

is now ready for opera

If you push (or pull) a button t

until you release the button. I

stage, the window will open (

automatically. If you operate

closing, it stops at this positi

The one-touch opening and c

tion has been switched off.

The one-touch function and r

malfunction in the electric wi

WARNING (continued)

A1 A2

Unlocking and locking104

es not prevent fingers or other parts of the t the window frame. Risk of accident.

ivated if the windows are closed from the

e ignition key for convenience closing

nd closing

ened and closed centrally from

ld the key in the door lock of the driver's

g or the unlocking position until all

unction are either opened or closed.

rupt this function.

hout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and others. The windows will nction if the convenience closing function is

is in the path of a window.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 104 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Roll-back function on electric windows*

The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk

of injuries when the windows are closing.

If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops

at this point and opens immediately .

If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window

could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds, the

window's closing force is automatically increased.

If the window is still obstructed, the window stops at this point.

If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to

close it again within five seconds. The roll-back function is now deactivated. The window closes with maximum force.

If more than 5 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one

of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a

malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened.

Never close the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.

Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.

The roll-back function do body getting pinched agains

Note The roll-back function is deact

outside of the vehicle using th

page 106.

Convenience opening a

The windows can be op

outside the vehicle.

Using the door lock: Ho

door in either the lockin

windows with electric f

Release the key to inter

WARNING

Never close the windows wit otherwise could cause seriou be closed with the rollback fu used. Make sure that no one

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking 105

Safety Fir Technical Data

n roof

e sliding/tilting roof

is opened and closed using the switch

itched on.

of

. 66 .

sunroof

roof,

.

Fig. 66 Interior roof trim: control of sliding/tilting roof

A1

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 105 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Mechanical vent wings

The rear vent wings can be opened and closed manually.

Opening

Pull the release lever fig. 65 in the direction of the arrow and

push it out at the same time until the lever engages.

Closing

Pull the release lever in the opposite direction to the arrow and

push it back until the lever engages.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the vent wings can result in injury!

Never close the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.

Sliding/tilting su

Opening and closing th

The sliding/tilting roof

when the ignition is sw

Opening sliding/tilting ro

Press the surface fig

Tilting the sliding/tilting

Press the surface .

Closing the sliding/tilting

Press the surface

Fig. 65 Release lever for mechanical vent wing

A2

A3

Unlocking and locking106

ep the key in the driver's door lock in the

sliding/tilting sunroof has closed.

rupt this function.

irst the windows and then the sliding roof will

g sunroof without observing and ensuring it is ause serious injury to you and others. The with the roll-back function activated. hat no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting

ry button remains in the last position selected

venience closing from outside the vehicle and

he next time you drive.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 106 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it

unattended .

If you wish to tilt the roof when the sliding roof is open, press surface until

the function has been carried out. If the sliding roof is to be opened directly

from the tilted position, press surface to carry out the required function.

Once the ignition has been switched off, the sliding/tilting sun roof can no

longer be opened or closed.

Sunroof blind

The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,

it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.

Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.

Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.

The sliding/tilting sunroof operates as long as the ignition is switched on.

Note The roof can be closed by hand if the system is defective.

Convenience closing*

Using the door lock: ke

close position until the

Release the key to inter

During convenience closing, f

be closed.

WARNING

Never close the sliding/tiltin clear, to do otherwise could c sliding/tilting sunroof closes However, always make sure t sunroof.

Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rota

if the roof is closed using con

will have to be re-positioned t

A2

A1

Unlocking and locking 107

Safety Fir Technical Data

ilting sunroof without observing and ensuring ould cause serious injury to you and others. the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 107 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof

The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects

getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does

not prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The

sliding/tilting sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed

when closing.

If the sliding/tilting roof has been opened again by the roll-back function, it

can be closed only by pressing button page 105, fig. 66 until the

sliding/tilting roof has closed fully. The sliding/tilting roof then closes without the roll-back function.

If it still does not close, consult a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.

Never close the sliding/t it is clear, to do otherwise c Make sure that no one is in

Fig. 67 Interior roof trim: control of sliding/tilting roof

A3

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking108

t To do so, insert a screwdriver on the

n the light and the covering and turn the

ead and undo the two Philips screws

irection of the arrow and remove

. 69 of the lever opening in the direction

its casing, insert it in the opening and

casing and turn the cover fig. 69

nterior light.

A1

A2

AA

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 108 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Manual release

In the event of a breakdown, the sunroof may be closed manually.

Remove the interior ligh

right-hand side, betwee

screwdriver.

Invert the screwdriver h

fig. 68.

Move the cover in the d

fig. 68.

Turn the cover fig

of the arrow.

Remove the lever from

close the roof.

Replace the lever in its

over the lever opening.

Replace the cover and i

Fig. 68 Manual release

Fig. 69 Manual release

AA

Lights and visibility 109

Safety Fir Technical Data

position O.

lights17)

osition or to the first stop. The

switch lights up.

lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)

osition to the last stop. A warning lamp

ent panel.

lights (vehicles with front fog lights)

osition or to the second stop. A

in the control panel.

will only work with the ignition on. The head-

hed to the side light setting while the engine is

nition has been switched off.

automatically comes on when the ignition is

ry to turn on the light switch. The daylight

as long as the ignition is switched on.

that it may dazzles drivers behind. You should

en visibility is very poor.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 109 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Lights and visibility

Lights

Switching lights on and off

Switching on the daylight driving light (only available in some countries)

To switch on the daylight driving lights, leave the light switch in

position O when you turn on the ignition.

Switching on the side lights

Turn the light switch fig. 70 to position .

Switching on dipped headlights

Turn the light switch to position .

Switching off the lights

Turn the light switch to

Switching on the front fog

Pull the switch out of p

symbol in the light

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the switch out of p

lights up in the instrum

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the switch out of p

warning lamp lights up

The dipped beam headlights lights are automatically switc

being started and after the ig

The daylight driving light18)

switched on. It is not necessa

driving lights are switched on

Rear fog light

The rear fog light is so bright

use the rear fog light only wh

Fig. 70 Detailed view of dash panel lights, fog light and rear fog light control

17) Optional equipment 18) for selected markets only

Lights and visibility110

.

nal lever towards the steering wheel

minutes after switching off the lights.

ed, the vehicle lights automatically light up for

is closed within 3 minutes, the guide lights will

seconds. If the door is closed after 3 minutes,

d the guide lights are not activated.

ents and switches and headlight

Fig. 71 Instrument panel: headlight range control

and illumination of instruments and switches A1

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 110 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a

factory-fitted towing bracket17), the rear fog light on the car will automatically

be switched off.

WARNING

Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped headlights if it is dark or if visibility is poor.

Note If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened. This is a reminder to switch

off the lights.

The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You

should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.

If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with

a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically

be switched off.

The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory

requirements.

Coming Home function (guide lights)

The Coming Home function (guide lights) allows the vehicle

lights to stay on for approximately 3 minutes after the ignition

is switched off.

To activate the Coming Home function the vehicle lights should have

already been switched on.

Switch off vehicle lights

Switch off ignition.

Keep all doors closed.

Briefly pull the turn sig

within a maximum of 2

Open the driver door.

When the driver's door is open

approx. 3 minutes. If the door

stay on for approximately. 30

the vehicle lights switch off an

Illumination of instrum range control

Lights and visibility 111

Safety Fir Technical Data

drivers, the dipped light should be adjusted d using the headlight range control. If not, an

he light cone, depending on the vehicle load.

hts are used to draw the attention of

r vehicle in emergencies.

afe distance from moving traffic.

. 72 to switch on the hazard warning lights

Fig. 72 Switch for hazard warning lights

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 111 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Illumination of instruments and switches

When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and

switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the

switch page 110, fig. 71 .

Headlight range control

Using the headlight range control, you can adjust the headlight range to the

load level that is being carried in the vehicle. In this way it is possible to avoid

dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same time, the driver

has the best possible lighting for the road ahead using the correct headlight

settings.

The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

To lower the beam, turn the switch down from the basic setting 0.

If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is

possible to select intermediary positions.

Dynamic headlight range control

Vehicles with gas discharge lamps19) (xenon lamps) are equipped with

dynamic headlight range control. When the dipped light is switched on, the

range of the headlights adjusts to the vehicle load condition. In these vehi-

cles, the control is not available.

WARNING

In order not to dazzle other according to the vehicle loa accident may occur.

Use the switch to lower t

Hazard warning lights

The hazard warning lig

other road users to you

If you have a breakdown:

1. Park your vehicle at a s

2. Press button fig

.

The settings on the switch correspond roughly to the following load condi- tions:

- Front seats occupied and light luggage in the vehicle

1 Several seats occupied and light luggage in the vehicle

2 All seats occupied and heavy luggage in luggage compartment

3 Front seats occupied and heavy luggage in luggage compart-

ment

19) Optional equipment

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

Lights and visibility112

f the hazard warning lights are left on for a long

itched off.

s are not working, you must use an alternative

o your vehicle. This method must comply with

ing lights described here is subject to the rele-

am headlight lever

n beam lever also operates the

eadlight flasher.

eam headlight lever has the following

Fig. 73 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 112 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

3. Switch the engine off.

4. Apply the handbrake firmly.

5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear. On an automatic move

the selector lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users

to your vehicle.

7. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for

instance when:

reaching the tail end of a traffic jam

there is an emergency

your vehicle breaks down due to a technical defect

you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are

switched on. The turn signal lights and the button warning light will

also flash. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched

off.

WARNING

The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle.

Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire!

Note The battery will run down i

time - even if the ignition is sw

If the hazard warning light

method of drawing attention t

traffic legislation.

The use of the hazard warn

vant statutory requirements.

Turn signal and main be

The turn signal and mai

parking lights and the h

The turn signal and main b

functions:

Lights and visibility 113

Safety Fir Technical Data

k when the ignition is switched on. The corre-

flashes in the combi-instrument. The warning

turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is

cted to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-

s at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs

does not light up. You should have the bulbs

lash at the same time when the hazard warning

ether that of the vehicle or of the trailer, the

ng twice as fast.

ts can only be switched on if the dipped beam

e warning lamp then comes on in the combi-

es on for as long as you pull the lever even if

on. The warning lamp then comes on in the

switched on, the front side light and the rear

e of the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights will

d from the ignition.

eft on after the key has been taken out of the

s when the driver door is opened. This is a

n signal, unless of course you wish to leave the

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 113 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Switching on the turn signals

Move the lever all the way up page 112, fig. 73 to indicate

right, and all the way down to indicate left.

Signalling a lane change

Move the lever upwards or downwards to change lanes.

Switching main beam on and off

Turn the light switch to position page 109, fig. 70.

Press the lever forward to switch on the main beams.

Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-

lights off again.

Headlight flasher

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the

flasher.

Switching on parking lights

Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the lock.

Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand

parking lights respectively.

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers.

Note The turn signals only wor

sponding warning lamp or

lamp 20) flashes when the

correctly attached and conne

tive, the warning lamp flashe

are damaged, warning lamp

replaced.

Both warning lamps will f

lights are switched on.

If one turn signal fails, wh

warning lamp will start flashi

The main beam headligh

headlights are already on. Th

instrument.

The headlight flasher com

no other lights are switched

combi-instrument.

When the parking light is

light of the corresponding sid

only work if the key is remove

If the turn signal lever is l

ignition lock, a buzzer sound

reminder to switch off the tur

parking light on.

A1

A2

A1 A2

A3

A4

20) Optional equipment

Lights and visibility114

ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked

off about 20 seconds after the closure of the

he vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

cker switch to switch the interior lights at front

t

rmediary position, the front and rear lights are

senger

passenger is switched on and off with the

r compartment

each rear door fig. 75.

eading light is switched on or off.

he front passenger side will only light up if the

glove box is open.

g

atically when the tailgate21) is opened and is

.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 114 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Interior lights and reading lights

The rocker control fig. 74 for the interior lights has the following posi-

tions: permanently lit , door contact connection and off.

Courtesy light position

The interior lights are automat

or a door is opened. and turn

doors. They also go off when t

switched on.

Interior light switched on

Press the symbol on the ro

and rear on permanently.

Switching off the interior ligh

When the switch is in the inte

permanently switched off.

Reading light for the front pas

The reading light for the front

button fig. 74 .

Reading light in the passenge

There is a reading light above

Using the button -arrow- the r

Glove compartment light

The light in the glove box on t

lights are switched on and the

Luggage compartment lightin

The light is switched on autom

switched off when it is closed

Fig. 74 Interior roof trim: Interior lighting and reading light in the front of vehicle

Fig. 75 Reading light in the passenger compart- ment

AA

21) Optional equipment

AB

Lights and visibility 115

Safety Fir Technical Data

light

ition (left reading light) or to position

).

ition . The interior lights are automati-

the vehicle is unlocked or the key

tion lock The light turns off about 20

ure of the doors. The interior lights are

vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

ding lights switched on

ition .

nd front passenger can be folded down or pulled

rned towards the doors.

n visors have covers. When you open the cover

up.

the cover of the make-up mirror is closed.

should make sure that the make-up mirror cover

events the battery discharging.

A2

A3

A5

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 115 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched

off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the

courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.

Reading lights function independently of the interior lights and must be

switched off manually to prevent the battery being drained when the engine

is switched off.

Interior light

Interior light permanently switched off

In switch position fig. 76, the interior and reading lights

are switched off.

Switching on the reading

Turn the switch to pos

(right reading light

Door light position

Turn the control to pos

cally switched on when

removed from the igni

seconds after the clos

switched off when the

switched on.

Interior lights or both rea

Turn the control to pos

Visibility

Sun visors

The sun visors for the driver a

out of their mountings and tu

The make-up mirrors in the su

, a lamp* in the roof lights

The roof light goes off when

Note Before you leave the car, you

in the visor is closed. This pr

Fig. 76 Interior light

A1

A4

A2

Lights and visibility116

the central console while the engine is running

eating. A symbol in the button lights up when

tched on.

tched off automatically after a delay of approx.

eating works only when the engine is running.

nt heating blower will be switched off when the

d on.

ir conditioning system page 153 the wind-

omatically switched on for a maximum of 4

outside weather conditions, to aid deicing.

Fig. 78 Centre console: windscreen heating button

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 116 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Rear window heating

To connect the rear window heater, press the button fig. 77 on the

console with the ignition on. A symbol in the button lights up when the rear

window heating is switched on.

The rear window heating is switched off after a delay of approx. 20 minutes.

It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing the button.

Windscreen heating*

Press button fig. 78 in

to switch on the windscreen h

the windscreen heating is swi

The windscreen heating is swi

10 minutes. The windscreen h

Note The passenger compartme

windscreen heating is switche

In vehicles fitted with an a

screen heating function is aut

minutes depending upon the

Fig. 77 Centre console: rear window heating button

Lights and visibility 117

Safety Fir Technical Data

osition .

osition .

position to give the windscreen a brief

sher system

n . A jet of water will be sprayed on the

ever is held in this position.

ipers will keep running for approximately

tion .

obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.

hould not use the wash / wipe system unless creen with the heating and ventilation system. rwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure

hanging wiper blades.

A2

A3

A4

A5

A0

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 117 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Windscreen washers

Windscreen wiper

The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers

and the automatic wash and wipe.

The windscreen wiper lever fig. 79 has the following positions:

Intermittent wipe

Move the lever up to position .

Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the

intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the right:

short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set using switch

.

Slow wipe

Move the lever up to p

Continuous wipe

Move the lever up to p

Brief wipe

Move the lever down to

wipe.

Windscreen wiper and wa

Pull the lever to positio

windscreen while the l

Release the lever. The w

4 seconds.

Switching off the wipers

Move the lever to posi

WARNING

Worn and dirty wiper blades

In cold conditions, you s you have warmed the winds The washer fluid could othe your view of the road.

Observe the warnings C

Fig. 79 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever

A1

AA

AA

Lights and visibility118

wipe function

position towards the steering wheel.

to function for a short period if you switch

e in motion.

utomatic wipe

wards to position fig. 80 . The rear

work immediately while the rear window

and continues working while the lever is

iper then wipes for approximately 4

tervals again.

e will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.

hanging wiper blades.

k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass

first time. If you switch on the wiper when the

ass, this could damage both the wiper blade

only function when the ignition is switched on

utomatically connected when the windscreen

engaged (manual gearbox) or the selector

x is placed in position R.

A6

A7

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 118 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the

glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers

when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both

the wiper blades and the wiper motor.

Rear window wiper

The windscreen wiper lever controls the rear window wipers

and the automatic rear window wash and wipe.

Connecting the intermittent wipe

Press the lever forwards to position fig. 80 . The wiper will

wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.

Switching off the interval

Pull the lever back from

The wiper will continue

off whilst the wipers ar

Connect the rear window a

Press the lever fully for

window washer starts to

wiper starts a little later

in this position.

Release the lever. The w

seconds, and then in in

WARNING

A worn or dirty wiper blad

Observe the warnings C

Caution In icy conditions, always chec

before using the wiper for the

wiper blade is frozen to the gl

and the wiper motor.

Note The rear window wiper will

and the tailgate is closed.

The rear window wiper is a

wiper is on and reverse gear is

lever of the automatic gear bo

Fig. 80 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever rear window wiper

A6

Lights and visibility 119

Safety Fir Technical Data

if you cannot see clearly through the

for interior mirror

n standard position, the lever on the lower edge

ards. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-

on for interior mirror22)

nterior mirror will darken automatically

ght it receives. The mirror will return to the

gear is selected.

Fig. 81 Automatic anti- dazzle function for inte- rior mirror

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 119 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Headlamp washer*

The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.

The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen

washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering

wheel page 117, fig. 79 for at least 5 seconds provided the dipped

headlights or main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects,

etc.) from the headlights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel

tank.

Note To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the

nozzles in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray.

Mirrors

Interior mirror

It is dangerous to drive

rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function

When the rear-view mirror is i

of the mirror should face forw

dazzle function.

Automatic anti-dazzle functi

When the ignition is on, the i

according to the amount of li

normal position if the reverse

A5

22) Optional equipment

Lights and visibility120

to position the mirror so that you have a

f the car .

r housings23)

to fold in the wing mirrors electri-

out23)

r position to fold the exterior mirrors back

adjustment23)

osition (left exterior mirror).

position the mirror so that you have a

the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will

e time (synchronised). If necessary the

tment may need correcting.

eated while the rear window heater

are switched on.

spheric mirror increase the field of vision maller and further away in the mirrors. If you the distance to vehicles behind you when

ke a mistake. Risk of accident.

A

AL

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 120 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

This function can be activated and deactivated by pressing the rearview

mirror switch page 119, fig. 81 . When it is activated, the warning lamp

lights up .

Exterior mirrors

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in

the driver's door.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob fig. 82 to position (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a

good view to the rear of the vehicle.

3. Turn knob to position (right exterior mirror).

4. Swivel the rotary knob

good view to the rear o

Electric folding wing mirro

Turn knob to position

cally.

Folding wing mirrors back

Turn the knob to anothe

out.

Synchronised wing mirror

1. Turn the control to the p

2. Turn the rotary knob to

good view to the rear of

be adjusted at the sam

right wing mirror adjus

Heated wing mirrors23)

The heated wing mirrors are h

page 116 and the ignition

WARNING

The rear view convex or a however the objects appear s use these mirrors to estimate changing lane, you could ma

A1

A2

Fig. 82 Detail of driver door: wing mirror controls

AL

AR

23) Optional equipment

A

Lights and visibility 121

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 121 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.

Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!

For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer

needed. Fuel is wasted otherwise.

Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be

adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be

observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the

adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be

completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as

this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage122

icle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- Section Child Safety

traints must always be adjusted to body size be properly adjusted to provide you and your

otection.

he footwell when the vehicle is moving; never out of the window or on the seat. This also correct sitting position exposes you to an event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. could sustain fatal injuries due to an improper

er and front passenger to maintain a distance ering wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect

s that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of ween the driver and the steering wheel or and the dash panel should always be as great

passenger seat only when the vehicle is at could move unexpectedly while the vehicle e the risk of an accident and therefore injury. our seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting

nts.

to installing a child seat on the front ling a child seat, observe the warning note in

of seats may, for safety reasons, only be used cover has been removed.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 122 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Seats and stowage

The importance of correct seat adjustment

Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection

offered by seat belts and airbags.

The driver seat, front passenger seat, and seats in the passenger compart-

ment, can be adjusted in many ways to suit the physical requirements of the

vehicle occupants. The correct seat position is very important for:

fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,

relaxed posture that does not cause drowsiness,

safe driving,

optimum protection from the seat belts and airbag system page 7.

Vehicle seats

Your vehicle has a total of five or seven24) seats.

First row of seats: two seats

Second row of seats: three seats

Third row of seats24): two seats

Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING

If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.

Never transport more people than there are seats available in the vehicle.

Every occupant in the veh belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system.

The seats and all head res and the seat belt must always passengers with optimum pr

Always keep your feet in t rest them on the dash panel, applies to passengers. An in increased risk of injury in the If the airbag is triggered, you sitting position.

It is important for the driv of at least 25 cm from the ste the minimum distance mean fatal injury. The distance bet between the front passenger as possible.

Adjust the driver or front stationary. Otherwise your se is moving. This could increas In addition, while adjusting y position. Risk of fatal accide

Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When instal Child safety.

The seats in the third row if the luggage compartment

24) Optional equipment

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage 123

Safety Fir Technical Data

int so that its upper edge is at the same

r head fig. 83 and fig. 84.

page 124.

traints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could lead to death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the occu-

Fig. 84 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 123 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Head restraints

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of you

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head res increases the risk of severe

Improperly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus pant's size.

Fig. 83 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

Seats and stowage124

of fitting without releasing the button.

t into the guides on the rear backrest.

fig. 85 (arrow) and push the head

it will go.

nt to suit body size.

ints have been removed. Risk of injury.

straint, you must always adjust it properly for tection.

warnings page 123, Correct adjustment

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 124 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Removing or adjusting head restraints

The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and

down.

Adjusting height

Hold the side of the head restraint.

Push the head restraint up (in the direction of the arrow) or push

it down with the button pressed fig. 85 (arrow). Correct setting

page 123.

Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in position.

Removing the head restraint

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Press the button fig. 85 -arrow-.

Pull head restraint out

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrain

Press and hold button

restraint down as far as

Adjust the head restrai

WARNING

Never drive if the head restra

After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pro

Please observe the safety of head restraints.

Fig. 85 Adjusting and removing the head restraints

Seats and stowage 125

Safety Fir Technical Data

support25)

e backrest and turn the hand wheel.

to its lowest position and push the seat

.

djust the backrest fully forward so that it

wheel when turning the seat round.

rn the seat round .

ight

h down (several times if necessary) from

adjusts the seat height in stages .

25)

underneath the arm rest to adjust it to the

ed area is determined by the settings made in

orts the natural curvature of the spine very effec-

r front passenger seat while the vehicle is in r seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting st the driver or front passenger seat only when

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 125 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Front seats

Adjusting front seats

The control elements fig. 86 are mirrored for the front right-hand

seat.

Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards

Pull up the lever and move the seat forwards or backwards

.

Then release the grip and move the seat further until the

catch engages.

Adjusting the backrest angle

Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.

Adjusting the lumbar

Take your weight off th

Turning the seat25)

Adjust the seat surface

back as far as it will go

On the driver's seat, a

will not hit the steering

Lift the lever and tu

Adjusting the seat he

Pull the lever up or pus

its home position. This

Adjusting the armrest

Turn the thumb wheel

size of the occupant.

The curvature of the cushion

the lumbar region. This supp

tively.

WARNING

Never adjust the driver o motion. While adjusting you position. Risk of injury. Adju the vehicle is stationary.

Fig. 86 Front left seat controls

A1

A1

A2

25) Optional equipment

A3

A4

A4

A5

A6

Seats and stowage126

ackrests of the front seats can be

itch fig. 87 to switch on the seat

ng is switched off in the 0 position.

hen the ignition is switched on. The left switch

nd the right switch the right seat heating.

g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or

le point to the seat cushion and backrest.

Fig. 87 Centre console: Seat heating controls

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 126 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back. Risk of injury. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to improper positioning of the belt web!

Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height or forwards/back- wards position. Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due care and attention.

Never turn the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting position. Risk of injury. Only turn the driver or passenger seats when the vehicle is stationary.

When the vehicle is in motion, the rotating front seats must be securely engaged and facing the direction of travel. These front seats may be used only when the vehicle is stationary.

Caution The driver seat and front passenger seat must not be occupied while they are

being turned. If the seat is occupied when it is turned, it could be damaged.

Seat heating

The seat cushions and b

heated electrically.

Turn the appropriate sw

heating. The seat heati

The seat heating only works w

controls the left seat heating a

Caution To avoid damaging the heatin

apply sharp pressure at a sing

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage 127

Safety Fir Technical Data

,

moved page 130,

at

d seat have the same functions as the conven-

tegrated child seat is described in Safety

g. 88 Maximum number of seats in the Alhambra

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 127 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Rear seats

Characteristics of seat equipment

The seats in the passenger compartment have the following features,

depending on the equipment level:

Integrated three-point seat belt with adjustable latch plate holder,

Integrated ISOFIX anchor points for a child seat,

Height-adjustable head restraints page 123,

Room for just one person

Adjustable armrests26),

Individual seats can be re

Integrated child seats26).

Seat with integrated child se

Seats with an integrated chil

tional individual seats. The in

first.

Seat layout

Second row, left seat.

Third row, left seat.

Second row, centre seat.

26) Optional equipment

Fi

A1

A2

A3

Seats and stowage128

seat is securely engaged.

djusting the seat backwards and forwards! backrest is tilted without due care and atten-

the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise your seat ile the vehicle is moving. This could increase erefore injury.

ommendations concerning seats

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 128 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Second row, right seat27).

Third row, right seat27).

Notes on the installation of the seats

Seats and are of the same construction and thus interchangeable.

Seats and are of the same construction and thus interchangeable.

Seat can be installed in positions .

Seat can be installed in place of seats , , and .

Moving seats

Make sure that the vehicle is not on a steep slope.

Pull the unlock lever fig. 89 upwards, in the direction of the

arrow, and hold in this position.

Move the seat.

Release the lever.

Always ensure that the

WARNING

Please be careful when a Injuries can be caused if the tion.

Adjust the seat only when could move unexpectedly wh the risk of an accident and th

Please observe safety rec page 132.

27) Optional equipment

A4

A5

A1 A2

A4 A5

A2 A1

A3 A1 A2 A4 A5

Fig. 89 Adjustment of the seat forwards and back- wards

Seats and stowage 129

Safety Fir Technical Data

t forwards

t the seat surface fig. 90 up or press

de of the seat fig. 91 down.

n until the backrest engages.

t down as far as it will go page 124.

ts.

t the seating surface fig. 90 up or

ar side of the seat fig. 91 down.

.

il it engages in the rear floor anchorings.

.

ure that it is properly engaged in the floor

int to suit body size.

ition when folded forwards. That is why the

er pulled or pushed again to push the backrest

A2

A2

A3

A3

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 129 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Folding the backrest and the seat forwards

There are two ways to fold the backrest and lift the seat.

Folding the individual sea

Pull the release lever a

the lever on the rear si

Press the backrest dow

Folding seat forward

Push the head restrain

Fold down the backres

Pull the release lever a

pull the loop on the re

Fold the seat forwards

Folding seat back

Fold the seat back unt

Fold back the backrest

Pull the seat up to ens

anchorings

Adjust the head restra

The backrest is locked in pos

release lever must be eith

up again.

Fig. 90 Side of seat: fold the backrest and lift seat forwards

Fig. 91 Rear of seat: fold the backrest and lift seat forwards

A2

Seats and stowage130

at

down as far as it will go page 124.

s page 129.

page 129.

in the third row28), push the seat back as

ards as far as it will go when removing a

. 92 under the seat together in the direc-

t the seat out of the floor anchorings.

th the seat together in the direction of

m in this position.

Fig. 93 Assembling seat: bar and retaining bolts

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 130 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

WARNING

If you do not hold the backrest firmly when you operate the lever for adjusting the backrest angle, the backrest will be pushed forward by springs. Risk of injury.

Always hold the backrest firmly when you adjust the backrest angle.

Please observe safety recommendations concerning seats page 132.

Removing and fitting individual seats

The seats can be fitted and removed more easily by two

people than by one person. Removing an individual se

Push the head restraint

Fold down the backrest

Fold the seat forwards

When removing a seat

far as it will go and forw

seat in the second row.

Push the two bars fig

tion of the arrow and lif

Assembling seat

Push the bars undernea

the arrow and hold the

Fig. 92 Bar for removing and installing the indi- vidual seat

28) Optional equipment

Seats and stowage 131

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 94 Removable armrest: button

Fig. 95 Protective bag for the removable armrests

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 131 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Place the seat frame page 130, fig. 93 between the

retaining bolts in the floor anchorings and release both bars.

Pull the seat up to ensure that it is properly engaged in the front

floor anchorings

Fold the seat back until it engages in the rear floor anchorings.

Fold the backrest back and adjust the head restraint to suit body

size.

Covers for the floor anchorings

After removing the seats in the passenger compartment, it is possible to fix

covers to the floor anchorings to stop dirt getting into them, for example. You

will receive 12 covers delivered with the vehicle.

Guide the cover into the floor anchoring and press it in.

The covers will have to be removed by levering them off with the vehicle key

before you can install the seats.

WARNING

Please observe safety recommendations concerning seats page 132.

ArmrestsAA

AB

Seats and stowage132

eats

the seats in the passenger compartment only e fulfilled at the same time:

be fitted in the appropriate floor anchorings aged.

s must be in the upright position and securely

st have access to the seat belts. The seat ctly.

e vehicle must be correctly seated while

moved can cause injury if it is transported in lways be fitted in the floor anchorings and he backrest must be in an upright position. If secured, it could become a life-threatening nts.

eet of seats are not soiled or damaged when

ts, including fitting and removal, may be hicle is stationary.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 132 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Adjusting the armrest

Turn the thumb wheel underneath the armrests to adjust the

angle of the armrests to your requirement.

Removable armrest*29)

Take hold of the armrest at the rear and press the button

page 131, fig. 94 in the direction of the arrow.

With the button pressed, pull the armrest off to the side out of the

holder.

When installing, please ensure that the armrest engages

securely in the holder.

The removable armrests for the second row of seats can be found in a trans-

port bag page 131, fig. 95.

The bag hangs from a head restraint of a seat in the last row of seats or, in

vehicles with 4 integrated child seats29), on the centre seat of the second row

of seats.

WARNING

The transport bag should always be secured properly when travelling in the vehicle as it could otherwise be a safety risk in an accident or braking manoeuvre. We recommend that you keep the bag at home.

The bag, if you do decide to keep it in the vehicle, may not be secured to the head restraint of an integrated child seat. The backrest could be forced forward in an accident or braking manoeuvre due to the weight of the bag.

Safety instructions for s

WARNING

Occupants may travel on if the following conditions ar

The seats must always and must be securely eng

The backrest of all seat engaged in this position.

The seat occupants mu belts must be fitted corre

All the occupants of th driving.

A seat which has been re the vehicle. Each seat must a must be securely engaged. T a bench seat is not properly hazard for all vehicle occupa

Make sure that the seat f removed from the vehicle.

All adjustment to the sea carried out only when the ve

29) Optional equipment

Seats and stowage 133

Safety Fir Technical Data

front passenger seats 180 to use the Alhambra

kfast room. Or you can easily remove the seats

travel with a lot of luggage.

in the luggage or passenger compartment can ng manoeuvre. Please ensure that these items

est of a seat in the second row when folding a forwards. Serious injuries can occur if a back- ngaged in position.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 133 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Some seat settings for the Alhambra

Examples of how the seating layout can be altered.

Of course, the illustrations show only some of the many seat combinations

possible in the Alhambra. You can, for example, purchase corresponding

retainers for your bicycle from SEAT Service. That means you will be able to

protect your bicycles from both theft and the weather when transporting

them.

Or you turn30) the driver and

as a conference room or brea

in the third row30) in order to

WARNING

Luggage and other items be thrown forward in a braki are secured properly.

Do not release the backr seat in the third row of seats rest has not been properly e

Fig. 96 Alhambra loaded with luggage.

Fig. 97 Alhambra trans- formed into conference room

30) Optional equipment

Seats and stowage134

partment cover closed while the vehicle is in njury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or

rument panel

t, press on the part closest to the air vents

of the arrow, this opens by spring action

and until it is completely closed.

Fig. 99 Central stowage on instrument panel

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 134 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Stowage compartments

Stowage compartment on the front passenger side

The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 98. It is locked

when the key slot* is horizontal.

Vehicle wallet compartment

The vehicle wallet should always be kept in the glove compartment.

Cooling the stowage compartment on the front passenger side

There is an air outlet on the right of the rear panel fig. 98. If the air condi-

tioning is switched on, cooled air can be fed into the compartment. Turn the

air vent to open and close it.

WARNING

Always keep the stowage com motion to reduce the risk of i in the event of an accident.

Central stowage on inst

To open stowage compartmen

(dotted area) in the direction

fig. 99.

To close, lower the cover by h

Fig. 98 Passenger side: stowage compartment

Seats and stowage 135

Safety Fir Technical Data

on centre console*

may include a stowage compartment between

.

Fig. 101 Stowage compartment on centre console

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 135 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Upper right stowage on instrument panel

To open, press as shown by arrow fig. 100. The stowage compartment

opens by spring action.

To close, lower the cover by hand until it is completely closed.

Stowage compartment

Some versions of the model

the radio and the Climatronic

Fig. 100 Upper right stowage on instrument panel

Seats and stowage136

e found in the front passenger door fig. 104

3 in vehicles with a curtain airbag31).

Fig. 103 Stowage area in the roof

Fig. 104 Stowage are in the driver door

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 136 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Stowage compartment in the luggage compartment

On the right there is a stowage compartment which can be used to store the

hazard warning triangles for example.

To open, pull cover in the direction of the arrow fig. 102.

To close, push cover in the direction of the arrow fig. 102.

Other stowage areas

Further stowage facilities can b

as well as in the roof fig. 10

Fig. 102 Stowage compartment in the luggage compartment

A1

A2

Seats and stowage 137

Safety Fir Technical Data

here are two cup holders

e cup holder briefly. The spring mecha-

older.

p in the direction of the arrow fig. 105

ders can cause injury.

cup holders should be used only for standard a maximum capacity of 0.5 litres.

Fig. 105 Cupholder in the centre console

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 137 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Coat hooks are located in the roof. They are integrated in the grab handles in

the passenger compartment.

Location of CD changer31)

The CD changer, which can be factory fitted, is located either in the dash

panel or in the right-hand stowage compartment in the luggage compart-

ment.

WARNING

Ensure that no objects can fall from the dash panel or other stowage areas into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or accelerator. Risk of accident.

Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view. Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti- cles of clothing. Do not leave any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging articles of clothing. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- cially those involving airbag deployment, these objects could injure the vehicle occupants.

Cup holders

In the centre console: t

Opening cup holder

Press the symbol on th

nism will release the h

Closing the cup holder

Push the cup holder u

until it engages.

WARNING

Improper use of the cup hol

For reasons of safety, the drinks cans and bottles with

31) Optional equipment

Seats and stowage138

to the rear of the front seat backrests.

le

direction of the arrow fig. 106 until it

the opposite direction of the arrow

ges.

Fig. 106 Folding table on right-hand front seat

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 138 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.

Ensure, when driving, that no can or other object is dropped in the driver footwell, as it could get under the pedals and obstruct their working. In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!

Never leave closed drinks cans in direct sunlight for any length of time. If the inside temperature is high they could explode.

Caution When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be

spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.

Note There is no left-hand cup holder on vehicles fitted with a hands-free tele-

phone system32)

Folding table

Folding tables are fitted

Folding out the folding tab

Fold the table up in the

engages.

Folding the table back

Push the table down in

fig. 106 until it enga

32) Optional equipment

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage 139

Safety Fir Technical Data

e attached to the head restraint of a seat used traint does not engage completely and will ccident.

ted on a head restraint when no-one is seated ent of an accident, it could cause injury.

nly be secured on the driver and front

he seats in the passenger compartment. The

maged when folding the seats backwards and

ts

Fig. 108 Net bag on seats in second row

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 139 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Clothes hangers

Removing the clothes hanger

Remove the head restraint page 124.

Pull the clothes hanger33) off the rods of the head restraint

fig. 107.

WARNING

The hanger must never b by children, as the head res come off in the event of an a

A hanger may only be fit in the seat behind. In the ev

Caution The clothes hangers should o

passenger seats and not on t

side trim will otherwise be da

forwards.

Net bag for small objec

33) Optional equipment

Fig. 107 Clothes hangers on the front seat

Seats and stowage140

shtray

ay cover fig. 109 forwards (arrow),

r down as far as it will go.

nsert, pull it to the front until it engages.

hicle have a stowage compartment in place of

htray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 140 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

The seats in the second row are fitted with a net bag page 139, fig. 108 for

the stowage of small objects.

The bag will hold a newspaper, can or standard bottle of up to a maximum of

0.5 litres .

WARNING

Ensure, when driving, that no can or other object is dropped in the driver footwell, as it could get under the pedals and obstruct their working. In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!

Ashtrays, cigarette lighter and electrical sockets

Front ashtray

Opening and closing the a

To open move the ashtr

until it engages.

To close, push the cove

Emptying the ashtray

To remove the ashtray i

Take out the ashtray.

No-smoking versions of the ve

the ashtray.

WARNING

Never put paper in the as ashtray.

Fig. 109 Front ashtray

Seats and stowage 141

Safety Fir Technical Data

age 140, fig. 109.

n fig. 111 inwards .

op out slightly.

ighter and light the cigarette on the

ehicle are fitted with a 12 volt socket in place of

ette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start

Fig. 111 Cigarette lighter in the ashtray

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 141 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Rear ashtrays

Emptying the rear door ashtrays

Open the ashtray and remove the interior of the ashtray.

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray.

Cigarette lighter

Open the ashtray p

Press the lighter butto

Wait for the lighter to p

Pull out the cigarette l

glowing coil.

No-smoking versions of the v

the lighter page 142.

WARNING

Improper use of the cigar a fire.

Fig. 110 Rear ashtray

Seats and stowage142

age area or the 12 Volt socket of the cigarette

er electrical consumers with a power rating of

t 34)

onnected to the 12-volt socket in the luggage

appliances connected to each socket must not

Watt.

ctricity from the additional battery on vehicles

attery34).

y appliances connected to them are also func- hed off and the key removed. Improper use of ssories can lead to serious injuries or cause a y, never leave children unsupervised in the

s with the engine switched off will drain the

l accessories, see the instructions on

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 142 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Take care when using the cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.

The cigarette lighter also works when the ignition is off and when the ignition key is removed. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children unsu- pervised in the vehicle.

Sockets

Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt

sockets.

Socket in the centre console

The 12 Volt socket in the stow

lighter34) can be used for furth

up to 120 Watt.

Socket, luggage compartmen

Electrical equipment can be c

compartment fig. 112 The

exceed a power rating of 120

The socket is supplied with ele

equipped with an additional b

WARNING

The electrical sockets and an tional with the ignition switc the sockets or electrical acce fire. To avoid the risk of injur vehicle.

Note Using electrical appliance

battery.

Before using any electrica

page 204.

WARNING (continued)

Fig. 112 Socket, luggage compartment

34) Optional equipment

Seats and stowage 143

Safety Fir Technical Data

uipment does not change to the last selected

reproduction of the external audio source. The

tion system remain in the AUX menu. Another

d manually.

ed a 3.5 jack connector. If the external audio

e of connector, an adapter should be used.

tached inside the vehicle could hinder the ries in the event of sharp braking or accident.

e must not be placed on the instrument panel vre can throw the device towards the compart- passengers.

e must not be assembled in any case near the system. A sharp manoeuvre can throw the ment and injure the vehicle passengers.

e must not be held in hand or on the legs while can throw the device towards the compartment ngers.

source cables so that they are not in the way

connected to the vehicle with the 12-volt power

ile playing with some adapters.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 143 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

AUX-IN Input

General notes

The AUX-IN socket is found on the centre console, next to the

gearbox lever.

The external audio sources connected to the AUX-IN socket will only be played

through the radio loudspeakers or the radio and navigation system. The

external audio sources can not be operated through the radio or the radio and

navigation system.

For operating the external audio source, consult the instructions manual of

the manufacturer in question.

If you wish, you can select whenever you want another audio source at the

radio or the radio and navigation system. While the external audio source is

not switched off, it will be playing as background.

Take into account that the eq

audio source on finishing the

radio or the radio and naviga

radio source must be selecte

For the AUX-IN socket you ne

source does not have this typ

WARNING

The objects which are not at driver and cause severe inju

The external audio sourc in any case. A sharp manoeu ment and injure the vehicle

The external audio sourc airbag. See chapter Airbag device towards the compart

The external audio sourc driving. A sharp manoeuvre and injure the vehicle passe

Place the external audio while driving.

Note If the external audio source is

point, jamming may occur wh

Fig. 113 AUX-IN socket location

Seats and stowage144

ent

mpartment

ose objects must be safely secured in

nt.

ng points to ensure the vehicle handles

e seats to increase the load area.

venly as possible in the luggage compart-

bjects directly on the floor of the vehicle.

be positioned above or in front of the rear

lly if you are transporting heavy objects

ecure heavy objects to the fitted fastening

the end of the vehicle, you must draw the

users to this. Observe legal requirements

open, please observe the instructions on

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 144 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Hazard warning triangles and first aid kit

Warning triangle

The hazard warning triangle may be fitted in the bracket behind the right trim

of the luggage compartment.

Note The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.

First-aid kit

In the bracket located behind the right hand trim in the luggage compartment

there is space for a standard first aid kit and the hazard warning triangle.

For reasons of space, in vehicles fitted with a removable tow bar35) the

bracket only holds a smaller first aid kit and the hazard warning triangle.

Note In some vehicles the first aid kit bracket is behind the left hand trim in the

luggage compartment.

The first aid kit is not issued as a standard feature with the vehicle.

The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.

Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. You should

purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the

first-aid kit has expired.

Before buying accessories and replacement parts, refer to the note

Accessories, modifications and renewal of parts.

Luggage compartm

Loading the luggage co

All luggage and other lo

the luggage compartme

Please observe the followi

well at all times:

If necessary, remove th

Distribute the load as e

ment.

Place and stow heavy o

If possible they should

axle.

Drive particularly carefu

page 146.

Use suitable straps to s

rings page 145.

If objects protrude over

attention of other road

when doing so.

When driving with the tailgate

page 100.

35) Optional equipment

Seats and stowage 145

Safety Fir Technical Data

reas by placing heavy objects on the vehicle

lement in the rear window and the window aerial

ld be damaged if objects on the luggage

st them.

eats from the passenger compartment, you

covering over the floor anchorings to prevent

cle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used

on slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-

tion slits are never covered.

ad to the fastening rings are commercially

s in the luggage compartment which

uggage and other objects.

damaged belts for fastening the luggage

he anchorage rings in Loading the

on page 144.

ble seat belts for the third row of seats and the

can be used as fastening rings for items of

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 145 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can cause serious injuries.

Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on the fastening rings.

Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into missiles. Risk of fatal injury.

Remember that transporting heavy objects modifies the driving condi- tions as the centre of gravity has been altered. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly, to avoid accidents.

Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Never leave the vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment closing the door behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal risk.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every passenger must be properly belted in.

Caution Avoid overloading small a

floor.

The wires of the heating e

in the rear side windows cou

compartment cover rub again

If you have removed the s

should place a large, robust

damage.

Note Air circulation in the vehi

air escapes through ventilati

ment. Ensure that the ventila

Straps for securing the lo

available.

Fastening rings

There are fastening ring

can be used to secure l

Always use suitable un

or any other object tot

luggage compartment

The retainers for the detacha

floor anchorings for the seats

luggage.

Seats and stowage146

icle place a sturdy mat or similar cover

icle.

t cover protruding parts of the vehicle

points from damage.

ll areas - spread the load.

ecure the objects to retaining rings.

lly and think ahead.

en braking and driving manoeuvres.

d read and observe all information on loading

ats from the passenger compartment, you

overing over the seat rails to prevent damage.

reas - spread the load.

the vehicle

ects in the luggage compartment can cause

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 146 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so

much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic

energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During

a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-

sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the

object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries

which might be sustained if this projectile strikes an occupant as it flies

through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be

further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING

If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.

To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward, always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening rings.

Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.

Loading heavy objects

Special care is required when loading heavy objects and

when driving a vehicle which contains heavy objects.

Observe the following points to prevent damage and accidents:

If necessary, remove the seats to increase the load area.

Before loading the veh

flush on floor of the veh

Where necessary, do no

floor.

Protect the seat anchor

Avoid overloading sma

Use suitable straps to s

Drive particularly carefu

If possible, avoid sudd

WARNING

For safety reasons, you shoul the vehicle page 146.

Caution If you have removed the se

should place a large, robust c

Avoid overloading small a

Safety notes on loading

WARNING

Loose luggage and other obj serious injuries.

Seats and stowage 147

Safety Fir Technical Data

cover

ent cover protects your luggage from

Fig. 114 Luggage compartment cover:: holders on the right

Fig. 115 Luggage compartment cover:: holders on the right

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 147 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Always stow objects safely in the vehicle and secure them on the fastening rings if necessary.

Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.

Loose objects in the vehicle can move suddenly. As the centre of gravity moves, safety is impaired and the vehicle becomes difficult to handle.

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into missiles. Risk of fatal injury.

Remember that transporting heavy objects modifies the driving condi- tions as the centre of gravity has been altered. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly, to avoid accidents.

Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Never leave the vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is open. Children could climb into the interior of the vehicle closing the door behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal risk.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all windows, the tailgate and all doors when you leave the vehicle.

Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every passenger must be properly belted in.

Luggage compartment

The luggage compartm

prying eyes.

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage148

nt in the rear window and the window aerial in

e damaged if objects on the luggage compart-

nhook the six hooks fig. 116 (arrows).

w of seats is used to store light items of

prevent items of luggage from being thrown

den braking manoeuvres or in accidents.

Fig. 116 Net partition fitted in the vehicle

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 148 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Opening the luggage compartment cover

After fitting the luggage compartment cover, pull the handle on

the cover back and hook in the cover on the side.

Removing the luggage compartment cover

Press the unlock button (with the luggage compartment cover

rolled up) page 147, fig. 114 in the direction of the arrow

and remove the cover from the right holder upwards.

Remove the cover from the left holder in the direction of the arrow

and remove from the vehicle.

Fitting the luggage compartment cover

Push the luggage compartment cover to the stop in the direction

of the arrow page 147, fig. 115 into the left-hand holder.

Press the cover down into the right-hand holder until it engages

in position.

Light items of clothing or other objects on the luggage compartment cover

can restrict visibility through the rear window.

WARNING

Never leave hard, heavy or sharp objects on the shelf (unrolled) or in the pockets of clothing on the luggage compartment cover. Animals must never be allowed onto the luggage compartment cover. During a sudden braking or driving manoeuvre or an accident, these objects and animals endanger all vehicle occupants.Risk of injury.

Caution The wires of the heating eleme

the rear side windows could b

ment cover rub against them.

Net bag*

To remove the net bag u

The net bag behind the last ro

luggage. The net partition can

forward into the vehicle in sud

A1

A2

A3

Seats and stowage 149

Safety Fir Technical Data

ng36), the basic supports can be fitted on the

e distance between the supports to the objects

h a sliding/tilting roof36), however, the front

the rear edge of the sliding/tilting roof when the

be removed?

save fuel, reduce wind noise and avoid theft).

omatic car wash.

approved by SEAT or fail to fit them according he roof carrier itself may fall off the vehicle roof accident or injury.

increased by transporting heavy or bulky cts the car's handling by shifting the centre of ptibility to cross winds. Both circumstances . Therefore you must adapt your driving style

conditions - avoid sudden braking or driving load on the roof carrier.

ust always be installed exactly according to

ons and fastenings for the roof carrier system

, tighten bolted connections and check the

e intervals, e.g. at each stop during a long trip.

is changed by the installation of the roof carrier

ear this in mind when driving through garage

here is danger of damage to the vehicle.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 149 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

Always fit the net partition carefully, observing the instructions. Risk of injury.

Heavy, pointed or sharp items which are not stowed securely can cause injury in the event of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, even if the net bag is correctly assembled.

For reasons of safety, vehicle occupants must not travel behind a fitted safety net.

Roof carrier

Safety notes on using the roof carrier

The roof carrier system must always be installed exactly

according to the instructions provided.

Your vehicle has special roof rails on the right and left for fitting the

mounts. Therefore, standard roof carriers cannot be used.

The mounts are the basis of a complete roof carrier system. Special

fixtures must then be added in order to safely transport luggage, bicycles,

skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. All these system components are avail-

able from SEAT Service. We recommend you use genuine SEAT roof carrier

systems. If you wish to use a different roof carrier, make sure that it can be

fitted securely to your vehicle and that it cannot damage your vehicle.

We recommend that you keep the assembly instructions provided by the

roof carrier manufacturer in your vehicle wallet.

Only the fitted retainers may be used to secure the carrier feet on vehicles

without a roof railing. These retainers are located underneath the plastic rain

channel between the markings.

In vehicles with roof edgi edge making sure to adapt th

to be carried. On vehicles wit

carrier may not be fitted near

roof is open.

When should the roof carrier

When it is not needed (to

Before cleaning in an aut

WARNING

If you do not use mounts to instructions, the load or t and onto the street. Risk of

The risk of an accident is loads on the roof, which affe gravity and increasing susce increase the risk of accident and speed to the prevailing manoeuvres when there is a

The roof carrier system m the instructions provided.

Caution Check all bolted connecti

before every trip. If necessary

system at regular, appropriat

The height of your vehicle

and the load secured on it. B

doors or low underpasses t

36) Optional equipment

Seats and stowage150

Therefore you must adapt your driving style onditions - avoid sudden braking or driving load on the roof carrier.

t the tailgate or rear window strike the roof load

damage to the vehicle.

vironment the roof for convenience even if it is not being

resistance means that the vehicle uses more

ld always take off the roof carrier when it is not

ng box*

box may only be installed in the posi-

e third row.

of the 12 Volt sockets in the vehicle. It

atts and has a capacity of approximately 32

e cooling and heating box is used for a long

tched off.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 150 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Damage to the vehicle caused by incorrect installation of mounts or roof

carrier systems not approved by the factory are excluded from the vehicle

warranty.

Securing the load

Loads transported on the roof carrier must be securely

attached. The car's handling is affected when transporting

loads.

The maximum permissible roof load for your vehicle is 75 kg. The load limit

applies to the combined weight of the carrier system and the load itself.

Distribute the load evenly. However, if you are using a roof carrier with a lower

weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum roof load. Do not

exceed the maximum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the

fitting instructions.

WARNING

If damaged, fine or inadequate securing straps are used to fasten objects carried on the roof, they could break in the event of sharp braking. This could cause an accident and serious injury.

Always use appropriate securing straps to secure objects on the roof carrier against sliding or flying off.,This could cause an accident. The load must be correctly secured.

Always respect the maximum authorised weight for the roof, the maximum authorised weight on the axles and the total maximum author- ised weight of the vehicle. Otherwise there is danger of causing an acci- dent.

The risk of an accident is increased by transporting heavy or bulky loads on the roof, which affects the car's handling by shifting the centre of gravity and increasing susceptibility to cross winds. Both circumstances

increase the risk of accident. and speed to the prevailing c manoeuvres when there is a

Caution Please take extra care not to le

when open there is a risk of

For the sake of the en The roof carrier is often left on

used. However, increased air

fuel. For this reason you shou

in use.

Cooling and heati

Notes on usage

The cooling and heating

tion of rear left seat in th

Power can be supplied by any

consumes approximately 33 w

litres.

The battery will discharge if th

period while the engine is swi

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage 151

Safety Fir Technical Data

for the installation and use of the cooling and

e manufacturer and should be kept with the

ling and heating box can be cooled or

function

the cooling and heating box so that the

lug is pointing to the notch.

ble plug into one of the vehicle's 12 volt

ling and heating box closed.

Fig. 117 Cooling and heating box as installed

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 151 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Before using the cooling and heating box for the first time, you should clean

it using a household detergent.

Disconnect the power supply and clean the box if you do not plan to use the

cooling and heating box for a long period. Place a folded towel between the

box and its lid. This prevents mould and damp stains forming in the cooling

and heating box.

Whenever possible, food and drinks should be stored in air-tight containers

in the box.

Do not overfill the box - this would prevent air circulation within the box.

Place crumpled paper (or similar) between bottles and other containers in the

box to prevent clanking noises.

Do not fill the interior of the box with liquid or ice.

Caution Do not place objects, blankets, or clothes on top of the cooling/heating

box, as the air intake and output may be obstructed and the box will discon-

nect itself.

Do not place any containers, food items or other objects into the box if

they are warmer than +50C. This could damage the cooling and heating box.

The cold/hot box is not suitable for transporting corrosive material or

material containing solvents.

Never leave the cold/hot box in the rain or damp.

Note The cooling and heating box is not designed to heat or cool the interior of

the vehicle. The cooling and heating box should be used only for cooling and

warming food and drinks and for transporting heat-sensitive items on short

journeys.

A corresponding manual

heating box is included by th

vehicle wallet.

Cooling or heating

The contents of the coo

kept warm.

Switching on the cooling

Insert the cable plug in

blue marking on the p

Insert the connector ca

sockets.

Keep the lid of the coo

Seats and stowage152

he cooling and heating box

cooling and heating box lid must always be vehicle is in motion. The cooling and heating cured in the correct floor anchorings.

vehicle is too low, the temperature in the box d the contents may freeze. Bottles and other

of injury.

cooling and heating box lid must not be used ehicle is in motion.

e cooling and heating box before the vehicle , it could drop down when the vehicle moves

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 152 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Switching on the heating function

Insert the cable plug in the cooling and heating box so that the

red marking on the plug is pointing to the notch.

Insert the connector cable plug into one of the vehicle's 12 volt

sockets.

Keep the lid of the cooling and heating box closed.

Switching the cooling and heating box off fully

Disconnect the power supply to the 12 Volt socket.

The internal temperature of the cooling and heating box is dependent on the

temperature in the vehicle. In cooling mode, the internal temperature can be

max. 20 degrees below the temperature in the vehicle. In heating mode it can

be max. 35 degrees above the temperature in the vehicle in Safety

notes on using the cooling and heating box on page 152.

If you switch directly from cooling to heating (or vice versa) it will take a rela-

tively long time for the interior to reach the desired temperature.

Faults

If the cooling and heating box does not work, proceed as follows:

Check whether there is power and whether the plug is securely in the

socket.

Make sure the power cable is not damaged.

Check the fuse for the power supply to the 12 Volt socket.

Run the engine to recharge the battery.

If these steps do not help, contact a qualified dealership.

Safety notes on using t

WARNING

For reasons of safety, the closed and latched when the box must always be firmly se

If the temperature in the may fall below +2 degrees an containers could burst. Risk

For reasons of safety, the as a table or shelf when the v

Always close the lid of th moves off. If the flap is open off. Risk of injury.

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 153

Safety Fir Technical Data

ction for the windscreen. The air recirculation

ched off and the windscreen heating37) is

n in from outside the vehicle is directed at the

ting for the front

e) or

g. 118 Instrument panel: Climatronic controls

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 153 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning

Climatronic

Controls

The Climatronic maintains the selected vehicle temperature automatically.

The cooling system only works when the engine is running and the

blower is switched on.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button

fig. 118.

The temperature and the blower can be controlled individually at the front or

rear of the vehicle.

Button defrost fun

and ECON mode are swit

switched on. The air draw

windscreen.

Display of the blower set

Display:

AUTO (automatic mod

Fi

37) Optional equipment

A1

A2

A3

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning154

ust be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. od visibility. Please familiarise yourself with eating and ventilation system, including the

the windows.

tes page 159.

mperature, flow, and distribution are

so that a specified temperature is

ossible and then maintained.

ode

.

erature We recommend 22C (72F).

is quickly reached when a temperature of

ic mode. It can be changed as necessary to suit

icular circumstances. It is possible to select

8C (64F) to +29C (86F). These are approxi-

tual temperature may be slightly higher or

de conditions.

(17.78C) is selected, the display switches to

trolled and in AUTO mode, the system runs at

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 154 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

ECON (cooling system off) or

OFF (entire system off)

Outside temperature display

Display for windscreen defrosting lights up when the windscreen

defrosting function is switched on

Display for air recirculation mode

Display for air flow

Display of the selected interior temperature front

Display of the blower setting rear

Display of the selected interior temperature rear

Button for the automatic mode

Button for air recirculation mode

Button for reducing the blower speed front

Button for raising the blower speed front

Button for directing the air flow to the chest

Button for directing the air flow to the footwell

Button for reducing the temperature front

Button for raising the temperature front

Button for reducing the blower speed rear

Button for raising the blower speed rear

Button for reducing the temperature rear

Button for raising the temperature rear

Button for switching the cooling system off

Switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit

Press and hold the button and press the button.

The selected temperature unit is then displayed.

WARNING

For road safety all windows m This is essential to ensure go the correct operation of the h demist/defrost functions for

Note Please observe the general no

Automatic mode

In automatic mode air te

automatically regulated

attained as quickly as p

Switching on automatic m

Press the button

Select the desired temp

A comfortable interior climate

+22C (72F) is set in automat

individual preferences or part

interior temperatures from +1

mate temperatures and the ac

lower depending on the outsi

If a temperature below +18C

LO The temperature is not con

maximum cooling output.

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11 AUTO

A12

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23 ECON

ECON AUTO

AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 155

Safety Fir Technical Data

off whenever an adjustment is made using the

blower. The temperature continues to be regu-

st one outlet in the instrument panel must be

uld otherwise ice over.

play.

g. 119 Instrument panel: Climatronic controls

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 155 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

If a temperature above +29C (86F) is selected, the display switches to HI In

this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature

is not controlled.

Climatronic maintains a constant temperature level fully automatically. This is

done by automatically adjusting the temperature of the air supplied to the

interior, the blower setting, and the air distribution. The system also allows

for the effect of strong sunlight, so there is no need for manual adjustment.

Therefore, automatic mode provides the best comfort for the vehicle occu-

pants in virtually all conditions throughout the year.

Automatic mode is switched

buttons for air distribution or

lated.

Note In the automatic mode, at lea

open. The cooling system co

Manual mode

In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, flow, and distribution yourself.

Switching on manual mode

Press one of the air distribution buttons fig. 119 or

several times, or one of the temperature buttons or .

is deleted from the dis

Fi

A15 A16

A17 A18 AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning156

pen a window to ensure an adequate supply of wise, when the Climatronic is switched off, no tale or contaminated air inside the vehicle

asing the risk of accident.

revents fumes or unpleasant smells

e.

e 155, fig. 119 to switch air recircula-

s is ON if the symbol is displayed

ts strong odours in the ambient air from

r example when passing through a tunnel or in

is low, using air recirculation mode provides

ting air from the vehicle interior instead of cold

is high, using air recirculation mode provides

ing air from the vehicle interior instead of warm

A12

A6

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 156 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Temperature

The selected temperature setting is shown on the display. It is possible to

select interior temperatures from +18C (64F) to +29C (86F). These are

approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher

or lower depending on the outside conditions.

If a temperature below +18C (17.78C) is selected, the display switches to

LO The temperature is not controlled and in AUTO mode, the system runs at

maximum cooling output.

If a temperature above +29C (86F) is selected, the display switches to HI In

this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature

is not controlled.

Blower

The blower can be adjusted gradually using the controls y . Always

have the blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air

into the vehicle. If the blower is set to 0, the Climatronic is switched off.

Air distribution

The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons and . It is also

possible to open and close some of the air outlets separately.

Switching off the cooling system

Pressing the button switches off the air cooling system to save fuel.

The temperature continues to be controlled, but the air cannot be cooled. The

set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the outside

temperature.

Switching the Climatronic on/off

Press button until OFF is shown on display . The Climatronic is switched

off. This function should be used in certain situations only (e.g. if the system

develops a fault).

The Climatronic is switched back on by pressing button .

WARNING

When the Climatronic is off o fresh air in the vehicle. Other fresh air enters the vehicle. S may cause drowsiness, incre

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode p

from entering the vehicl

Press the button pag

tion mode on or off. Thi

on the screen.

Air recirculation mode preven

entering the vehicle interior, fo

queuing traffic.

When the outside temperature

more effective heating by hea

air from outside.

When the outside temperature

more effective cooling by cool

air from outside.

ECON

A13 A3

AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 157

Safety Fir Technical Data

for the passenger compartment

used to lower or raise the blower speed

r volume.

orks only in air recirculation mode. Fresh air is

g. 120 Instrument panel: Climatronic controls

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 157 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

Do not leave the air recirculation function on for long periods. In air recircu- lation mode, no fresh air enters the vehicle interior. Also, if the cooling system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Stale or contam- inated air inside the vehicle may cause drowsiness, increasing the risk of accident.

Climatronic for the passenger compartment

Setting the blower speed for the passenger compartment

The temperature is selected with buttons fig. 120 and .

It remains stored until another temperature is selected.

Setting the blower speed

Buttons and are

and thus adjust the ai

The Climatronic for the rear w

not drawn into the vehicle.

Fi

A21 A22 A19 A20

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning158

nger compartment

senger compartment

he passenger compartment heating system are

ft side panel at the rear.

Fig. 121 Air outlets for heating the passenger compartment

Fig. 122 Cold air vents in the roof

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 158 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

The Climatronic can be fitted either with or without an additional cooling

system38) for the passenger compartment.

Climatronic for the passenger compartment without additional cooling system

The temperature setting for the rear can be max. 3C higher than the temper-

ature in the passenger compartment. A lower temperature can not be set.

If the Climatronic detects that the passenger compartment has to be heated,

it activates the additional heat exchanger. The air outlets on the floor guide

warm air into the vehicle page 158.

If the Climatronic detects that the passenger compartment has to be cooled,

cooled air is fed into the vehicle via the air outlets in the front of the vehicle

only page 158.

Climatronic for the passenger compartment with additional cooling system

The temperature setting for the rear can be max. 3C lower than the tempera-

ture in the passenger compartment.

If the Climatronic detects that the passenger compartment has to be heated,

it activates the additional heat exchanger. The air outlets on the floor guide

warm air into the vehicle page 158.

If the Climatronic detects that the passenger compartment has to be cooled,

cooled air is fed into the rear of the vehicle via the open air outlets in the roof

page 158.

Air outlets in the passe

Air outlets for heating the pas

The air outlets fig. 121 for t

located at the bottom of the le38) Optional equipment

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 159

Safety Fir Technical Data

a barrier against impurities in the ambient air (

m to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen

intervals specified in the Service Schedule.

ematurely due to use in areas with very high

len filter must be changed more frequently than

le.

atronic40) is not switched on for a long period,

an cause unpleasant smells. To prevent these

hould be run at the highest blower setting at

peratures are over +5C. Briefly open a window

air conditioning

ymbols in the Climatronic flash for approx. 15

switched on. Contact a specialist workshop.

cannot be switched on this may be caused by

.

f.

is lower than +5C.

ressor has been temporarily switched off

emperature is too high.

is faulty.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 159 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Air vents in the roof

In vehicles with a second cooling system39) for ventilating the passenger

compartment, an air outlet is fitted in the roof above each rear seat

fig. 122.

The air outlets in the roof can be opened and closed individually and

adjusted by moving the grid.

Each air outlet has two thumb wheels. The left thumb wheel can be used to

open and close the air outlet. The right thumb wheel can be used to direct the

air towards the head and chest.

WARNING

Never leave objects, food or medicines in front of the air outlets in the rear seats. The hot air could damage or destroy heat-sensitive objects, food or medicines.

Caution Do not use the area in front of the outlets to store objects. This could cause

the blower to overheat and switch off. The blower could also be damaged.

Note In the cooling mode, at least one air outlet in the roof must be open. The

cooling system could otherwise ice over.

General notes

The pollution filter

The pollution filter serves as

e.g.dust and pollen).

For the air conditioning syste

filter must be replaced at the

If the filter loses efficiency pr

levels of air pollution, the pol

stated in the Service Schedu

Instructions for use

If the air conditioning or Clim

deposits on the evaporator c

odours, the cooling system s

least once a month when tem

at the same time.

Faults in the operation of the

There is a fault if the all the s

seconds when the ignition is

If the air conditioning system

the following reasons:

the engine is not running

The blower is switched of

The outside temperature

the cooling system comp

because the engine coolant t

The air conditioning fuse

39) Optional equipment 40) Optional equipment

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning160

irculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the

ue on the evaporator, producing a permanent

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 160 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-

ified workshop.

WARNING

Please note that when the Climatronic is switched off, no fresh air will enter the vehicle interior. For this reason you should ensure that sufficient fresh air is able to enter the vehicle by opening a window or the sliding/tilting sunroof 40) when the Climatronic is switched off.

Caution If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch off the air

conditioning with button to prevent further damage and have it

checked by a qualified workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and

special tools. Therefore, we recommend that you take the vehicle to a quali-

fied workshop should problems occur.

Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool under-

neath the vehicle, this is completely normal and there is no need to suspect

a leak.

Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and

leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired, and to prevent the

windows misting over.

The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows

and the sliding /tilting roof 40) closed. However, if the sun has heated up the

vehicle, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows for

a short period.

Do not smoke while air rec

cooling system leaves a resid

unpleasant odour.

ECON

Driving 161

Safety Fir Technical Data

to the correct position.

e steering column fig. 123 down

eel in this way until the correct position is

again firmly .

ring column adjustment function and an incor- ult in serious injury.

teering column should be adjusted only when k of accident.

Fig. 124 Proper sitting position for driver

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 161 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Driving

Address

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely

adjusted to suit the driver.

Adjust the driver seat

Push the lever under th

.

Adjust the steering wh

set fig. 124.

Then push the lever up

WARNING

Incorrect use of the stee rect seating position can res

To avoid accidents, the s the vehicle is stationary. Ris

Fig. 123 Adjusting the steering wheel position

Driving162

programme (ESP)

safer in certain situations.

ogramme (ESP) contains the electronic differ-

ion control system (TCS). The ESP works

brake system (ABS). Both warning lamps will

ems are faulty.

lly when the engine is started.

re you require less traction, you can switch off

fig. 125 .

ains,

or on loose surfaces,

Fig. 125 Detailed view of dash panel ESP button

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 162 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your breast bone page 161, fig. 124. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you decide if special specific modifica- tions are necessary.

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.

Safety

Electronic stabilisation

ESP helps make driving

The Electronic Stabilisation Pr

ential lock (EDL) and the tract

together with the anti-locking

light up if the ESP or ABS syst

The ESP is started automatica

In specific circumstances whe

the ESP by pressing button

For example:

when driving with snow ch

when driving in deep snow

WARNING (continued)

Driving 163

Safety Fir Technical Data

key

g lock

ignition is switched off, and the steering wheel

l lock, take out the key and turn the wheel

engage. You should always lock the steering

ehicle. This makes vehicle theft more difficult

glow plug system

osition and let go of the key. If the key cannot be

om position to position , move the

d off the steering lock mechanism) until the key

Fig. 126 Ignition key positions

A1

A2

A1 A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 163 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for

example.

You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer

need wheel spin.

The TCS and EDL are also switched off if the ESP is switched off. This means

that this technology is not available for as long as the ESP remains switched

off.

When does the inscription OFF light up on the button?

It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.

WARNING

The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP.

Ignition lock

Position of the ignition

Ignition switched off, steerin

In position fig. 126 the

lock can be engaged.

To engage the steering whee slightly until you hear the pin

wheel when you leave your v

.

Switching on the ignition or

Turn the ignition key to this p

turned or is difficult to turn fr

steering wheel (to take the loa

turns freely.

ESP

A1

Driving164

tion key

be taken out of the ignition lock if the

ion P.

, you can remove the ignition key only if the

tor lever page 169 is in position P. The

the ignition key has been removed.

ts unauthorised persons from driving

at deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

rted into the ignition.

automatically activated when you take the key

d using a genuine SEAT key with the correct

d properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 164 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Starting

The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components

with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.

Each time that the vehicle must be started, the ignition key must be turned to

the position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents

possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING

Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition key from the lock. The steering lock could be activated immediately - Risk of accident!

Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short period. This is especially important if you must leave children or disabled people in the vehicle, they could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the windows possibly resulting in an accident.

Unsupervised use of the keys could result in the engine being started or electrical systems, such as the electric windows, being used. This can result in serious injury.

Caution The starter must not be used unless the vehicle is at a standstill (key position

). If the starter is used as soon as the engine is switched off, the starter or

the engine could be damaged.

Safety interlock for igni

The ignition key can only

selector lever is in posit

After switching off the ignition

automatic gearbox gear selec

selector lever is blocked after

Electronic immobiliser

The immobiliser preven

the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip th

matically when the key is inse

The electronic immobiliser is

out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be starte

code.

Note The vehicle cannot be operate

key.

A3

A1

A3

Driving 165

Safety Fir Technical Data

accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause people n also cause death.

nattended if the engine is running.

rays, they could explode or cause the engine njury.

ou should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

the engine. Risk of engine damage.

pushed or towed for more than approximately

. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first

of another vehicle. Observe the warnings in the

nvironment y running it with the car stationary. You should

the engine. This helps the engine reach oper-

reduces emissions.

e

started using a genuine SEAT key with

al (if it is an automatic gearbox, place the

.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 165 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Starting and stopping the engine

Starting a petrol engine

The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with

the correct code.

Place the gear in neutral (if it is an automatic gearbox, place the

gear lever in P or in N).

In vehicles with a manual gearbox, depress the clutch pedal fully

and hold it in this position, the starter will then only have to turn

the engine.

Turn the ignition key to position page 163, fig. 126 to start

the engine.

Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter

motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.

You may need to press the accelerator briefly after starting a very hot engine.

When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few

seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve lifters. This is

quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about

10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. If the engine still does not

start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked.

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless

poisonous gas. Risk of fatal to lose consciousness. It ca

Never leave the vehicle u

Never use cold start sp to run at high revs. Risk of i

Caution When the engine is cold, y

full throttle and over-loading

The vehicle should not be

50 metres to start the engine

damage it.

Before attempting to push

try to start it using the battery

chapter Help with Ignition.

For the sake of the e Do not warm up the engine b

drive off as soon as you start

ating temperature faster and

Starting a diesel engin

The engine can only be

the correct code.

Place the gear in neutr

gear lever in P or in N)

A3

WARNING (continued)

Driving166

ccidents. Carbon monoxide can cause people also cause death.

nattended if the engine is running.

ays, they could explode or cause the engine jury.

ou should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

he engine. Risk of engine damage.

pushed or towed for more than approximately

Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first

of another vehicle. Observe the warnings in the

vironment running it with the car stationary. You should

he engine. This helps the engine reach oper-

educes emissions.

e

position page 163, fig. 126 .A1

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 166 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

In vehicles with a manual gearbox, depress the clutch pedal fully

and hold it in this position, the starter will then only have to turn

the engine.

Turn the ignition key to position page 163, fig. 126 . The

warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are

preheating the engine.

When the warning lamp goes out, turn the key to position to

start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.

Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the starter

motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.

When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few

seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve lifters. This is

quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If you have problems starting the engine, please refer to Help with Ignition.

Glow plug system

To avoid unnecessary loads on the battery, do not use any other major elec-

trical equipment while the glow plugs are preheating.

Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp goes out.

Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry

If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal

(up to one minute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. This is because air

needs to be bled from the fuel system while starting.

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless

poisonous gas. Risk of fatal a to lose consciousness. It can

Never leave the vehicle u

Never use cold start spr to run at high revs. Risk of in

Caution When the engine is cold, y

full throttle and over-loading t

The vehicle should not be

50 metres to start the engine.

damage it.

Before attempting to push

try to start it using the battery

chapter Help with Ignition.

For the sake of the en Do not warm up the engine by

drive off as soon as you start t

ating temperature faster and r

Switching off the engin

Stopping the engine.

Turn the ignition key to

A2

A3

WARNING (continued)

Driving 167

Safety Fir Technical Data

r

tationary with the engine idling. Press the

. 127 in the middle (neutral).

wn and then to the left and forwards into

own on the gearstick.

engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When

engaging this gear wait about 6 seconds with

order to protect the gearbox.

d and the ignition is switched on the following

Fig. 127 Manual gearbox with shift diagram

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 167 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10

minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. The radiator fan can start auto-

matically if the hot engine causes the coolant temperature to rise, or if the sun

heats the engine compartment.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine until the vehicle is stationary.

The brake servo and the power assisted steering work only when the engine is running. You need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury.

The steering lock can engage immediately when the key is removed from the ignition lock. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.

Caution If the engine has been driven hard for a long period, the engine could over-

heat when it is switched off. Risk of engine damage. For this reason, you

should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.

Manual gearbox

Manual gearbox

Selecting the reverse gea

The vehicle should be s

clutch right down.

Put the gearlever fig

Press the gearstick do

the reverse position sh

The reverse gear can only be

the engine is running, before

the clutch pressed in fully in

When reverse gear is engage

takes place:

Driving168

x

has two gearbox programmes.

tem is equipped with two driving programmes.

e driving situation, either a consumption

e sporty programme will be selected.

be carried out automatically depending on how

programme will be selected if you use the

. This means that the gearbox will shift up

ogramme which shifts up gear later will be

rator more quickly.

Fig. 128 Centre console: selector lever of the auto- matic gearbox with locking button

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 168 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

The reversing lights come on.

The heating or air conditioning automatically change to air recirculation

mode.

The rear window heater switches on when the windscreen wiper is acti-

vated.

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released.

Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci- dent.

Caution Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure of your

hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid

unnecessary wear and damage.

Do not hold the car on the clutch on hills. This causes premature wear

and damages the clutch. It can also prevent power being transferred from the

engine to the gearbox.

Automatic gearbo

Gearbox programmes

The automatic gearbox

The gearbox management sys

Depending on the driver or th

oriented programme or a mor

The programme selection will

the accelerator is used.

The consumption-oriented

accelerator slowly or normally

earlier and down later.

A more sporty driving pr

selected if you use the accele

Driving 169

Safety Fir Technical Data

tomatic gearbox

e forward gears up and down auto-

e selector lever in position P or N. Further

65.

ke pedal.

k button (button on the knob of the

168, fig. 128, select gear position (R, D or

n and wait for the gearbox to engage the

nt can be felt).

press the accelerator .

revent the car creeping forwards, e.g. at

tor lever does not need to be put into the

s.

erator.

ke pedal until the vehicle comes to a

irmly.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 169 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Note A programme will, depending on the driving resistance, be selected automat-

ically that guarantees more pulling power, thus avoiding having to shift gear

constantly.

Selector lever lock

The selector lever lock in position P or N prevents gears from

being engaged inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle

to move.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

Switch on the ignition.

Press and hold the brake pedal and press the selector lever lock

on the left of the selector lever at the same time page 168,

fig. 128.

The selector lever lock only works if the vehicle is stationary or driving at

speeds up to 5 km/h (approx. 3 mph). At higher speeds the selector lever

lock is disengaged automatically in the N position.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly

through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for

instance, to rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow

or mud. The selector lever lock engages automatically if the brake pedal is not

depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about 1 second.

Driving a car with an au

The gearbox changes th

matically.

Switching on

Start the engine with th

information page 1

Driving

Press and hold the bra

Press and hold the loc

selector lever) page

S).

Release the lock butto

gear (a slight moveme

Release the brake and

Stopping briefly

Use the foot brake to p

traffic lights. The selec

positions P or N for thi

Do not press the accel

Parking the vehicle

Press and hold the bra

standstill .

Apply the handbrake f

Driving170

ver leave your vehicle if the engine is running have to leave your vehicle while the engine is parking brake and engage parking lock P.

d if D, S or R is engaged, you will need to hold car will creep forward as the power transmis- ven when the engine is idling.

or when you move the selector lever. Risk of

ever to R or P when driving. Risk of accident!

teep gradient, reduce your speed and use ar.

hicle on a gradient, always hold the vehicle in to stop it from rolling back.

rub and do not use the brake pedal too often braking will cause the brakes to overheat and brake effect. This increases the braking brake system to fail.

down a gradient with the gear in neutral N, or ven if the engine is not running.

gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling

when a gear has been selected. Otherwise, the

ft gearbox* may overheat causing damage. Pull

ess the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from

ith the selector lever in position N with the

atic gearbox / direct shift gearbox* will be

icated.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 170 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Press and hold the lock button, move the selector lever to P and

release the lock button.

Driving up and down hills

Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the

Tiptronic selector gate.

Lightly press the selector lever back to change down.

Holding the car on a hill

You should always hold the vehicle in position with the footbrake

to stop it from rolling backwards . Do not try to prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards by increasing the engine

speed while a range of gears is selected

Moving away on an incline

With a gear engaged, take your foot from the brake and depress

the accelerator.

The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you will need. This increases the

braking effect of the engine. For example, you should drive down a very steep

slope in 3rd gear. If the engine brake effect is not sufficient, the vehicle will

gain speed. The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox automatically

changes up to prevent the engine over revving. Use the foot brake to reduce

speed and change into 3rd gear using Tiptronic .

Your vehicle has an automatic interlock which prevents the selector lever

being put into a position for driving forwards or in reverse from positions P or

N if the brake pedal is not depressed.

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is in position P.

WARNING

As a driver you should ne and a gear is engaged. If you running, you must apply the

If the engine is running an the car on the foot brake. The sion is not fully interrupted e

Never press the accelerat accident.

Never move the selector l

Before you drive down a s Tiptronic to select a low ge

If you have to stop the ve position using the foot brake

Never allow the brake to or for long periods. Constant will considerably reduce the distance and could cause the

Never allow the car to roll in selector lever position D, e

Caution If you stop the vehicle on a

by depressing the accelerator

automatic gearbox /direct shi

the handbrake on fully or depr

rolling away.

If you allow the car to roll w

engine switched off, the autom

damaged as it will not be lubr

Driving 171

Safety Fir Technical Data

d on the side of the selector lever and on the

bi-instrument.

this position, the drive wheels are locked

aged only when the vehicle is stationary .

m position P, the locking button in the selector

and the brake pedal depressed at the same

tched on.

be pressed to select the selector lever position

, the selector lever cannot be removed from the

in this position.

d only when the vehicle is stationary and the

position R, press in the lock button and at the

dal, with the ignition switched on.

ition R and the ignition switched on the

on.

oning automatically change to air recirculation

witches on when the windscreen wiper is acti-

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 171 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Note The two clutch system of the direct shift gearbox* has a system to protect

against excess strain, which may occur, for example, when the vehicle is held

on a hill with the clutch and the gearbox oil overheats. When the clutch is

overloaded, the vehicle begins to jerk and the position indicator of the

selector lever begins to flash. To avoid breakdowns, the clutch breaks the

power transmission between the engine and the gearbox, as a result of which

the vehicle loses impetus. If the clutch opens automatically due to over-

loading, depress the brake pedal and wait a few seconds before

continuing.

Selector lever positions

The selector lever positions and gears are shown on the

display in the combi-instrument.

Selector lever positions

The gear selected is displaye

display fig. 129 in the com

P - parking lock

When the selector lever is in

mechanically.

The parking lock must be eng

To move the selector lever fro

lever handle must be pressed

time when the ignition is swi

Only the locking button has to

P.

If the battery has discharged

P position.

R - reverse gear

The reverse gear is engaged

Reverse gear must be engage

engine is idling .

To move the selector lever to

same time press the brake pe

With the selector lever in pos

following occurs:

The reversing lights come

The heating or air conditi

mode.

The rear window heater s

vated.

Fig. 129 Instrument panel: display showing position of selector lever

Driving172

lly to N when driving, take your foot off the

speed drop to idling before selecting D

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 172 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

N - neutral (idling)

If this position is selected, the gearbox is in neutral. Power is not transmitted

to the wheels and the engine does not have a braking function.

Never use the N position to drive down a hill. The engine does not function as

a brake and the brakes are subjected to excessive stain.

You could damage the automatic gearbox if you drive down hills with the

selector lever in position N and the engine switched off.

D - Drive (forwards)

In this position the gearbox automatically changes automatically to a longer

or shorter gear, according to the driving style and speed. The braking effect

of the engine when driving downhill is very limited when the selector is in this

position. The display also shows which gear has been selected in addition to

position D.

If position N has been selected and you wish to select D, you must press the

foot brake if the vehicle is stationary, or travelling at under 5 km/h (approx.

3 mph) .

WARNING

Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Risk of accident!

Never drive the vehicle with the engine and the ignition switched off. You could loose control of the vehicle. The brake servo only functions when the engine is running as does the elector-mechanical steering system. You need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle when the engine and the ignition are switched off. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury.

Caution If you allow the car to roll with the selector lever in position N with the engine

switched off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged as it will not be lubri-

cated.

Note If the lever is moved accidenta

accelerator and let the engine

again.

Driving 173

Safety Fir Technical Data

ronic (selector lever)

r from position D to the right into the

te fig. 130.

tor to the front + to change up.

tor lever back - to change down.

atic gearbox automatically shifts up to the next

um permitted engine speed is reached.

automatic gearbox does not change down until

e engine could no longer over rev.

tronic

ifted manually or using Tiptronic, the indi-

e display fig. 131.

s designed to give maximum acceler-

ght down, the gearbox automatically changes

peed and engine speed, to give the vehicle full

p to the next gear until the engine reaches the

speed for the gear.

vehicle if you accelerate quickly on slippery serious injury.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 173 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Changing gear with Tiptronic

The Tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears

manually.

Changing gear with Tipt

Press the selector leve

Tiptronic selector ga

Lightly press the selec

Lightly press the selec

When accelerating, the autom

gear shortly before the maxim

If a lower gear is selected, the

the point is reached where th

Gear selection display for Tip

If the automatic gearbox is sh

vidual gears are shown on th

Kick-down function

The kick-down feature i

ation.

If you press the accelerator ri

down a gear, depending on s

acceleration.

The gearbox does not shift u

maximum determined engine

WARNING

You could lose control of the surfaces. This may result in

Fig. 130 Centre console: gearbox selector lever with locking button

Fig. 131 Instrument panel: display showing position of selector lever

Driving174

lights up when the handbrake is applied

The warning lamp goes out when the hand-

to slow down the vehicle when it is in motion. iderably longer, as braking is only applied to ent!

brake slightly applied. This could cause the ose their braking efficiency. Risk of accident. ear on the rear brake pads/linings.

efore you leave the vehicle. On cars with a

ear, or on an automatic move the selector lever

lways be firmly applied when the

points when parking the vehicle:

op the vehicle.

rmly.

ngage 1st gear. On an automatic move

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 174 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Be particularly careful, therefore, when using the kick-down function on slippery road surfaces.

You should use the kick-down function only when traffic and weather conditions allow it to be used safely.

Handbrake

Using the handbrake

The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the

vehicle from accidentally rolling away.

Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when

you park.

Using the handbrake

Firmly pull the handbrake lever up all the way.

Releasing the handbrake

Firmly pull the handbrake lever up all the way.

Push in the lock button on the handbrake lever.

Keep the locking knob pressed and push the lever all the way

down .

The handbrake is located at the side of the driver seat. Always apply the

handbrake firmly. This prevents you driving with the handbrake applied

.

The handbrake warning lamp

and the ignition switched on.

brake is released.

WARNING

Never use the handbrake The braking distance is cons the rear wheels. Risk of accid

Never drive with the hand rear brakes to overheat and l This also causes premature w

Caution Always apply the handbrake b

manual gearbox engage 1st g

to P.

Parking

The handbrake should a

vehicle is parked.

Always note the following

Use the foot brake to st

Apply the handbrake fi

On a manual gearbox e

the selector lever to P.

WARNING (continued)

Driving 175

Safety Fir Technical Data

warning system*

arning system is a parking aid which

obstacles in front or behind the

system assists the driver when parking. If the

ing an obstacle, an intermittent sound signal is

nce, the shorter the intervals between tones. If

obstacle, the sound signal becomes constant.

t the front is indicated via a high tone and via a

ter the distance, the shorter the intervals

is too close to the obstacle, the sound signal

e detected if the vehicle gets even closer to it!

when

rom the obstacle

e a constant distance for approximately 3

d off once the vehicle has reached the perma-

sors: from approx 80 cm

approx 120 cm

approx 160 cm

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 175 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock.

Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.

Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle

.

Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll against the kerb if it did

start to roll.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point

towards the kerb.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away

from the kerb.

WARNING

Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.

Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever / selector lever.

Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Parking distance

Description

The parking distance w

draws your attention to

vehicle.

The parking distance warning

rear of the vehicle is approach

emitted. The shorter the dista

the vehicle is too close to the

The distance to an obstacle a

low tone at the rear. The shor

between tones. If the vehicle

becomes constant.

The obstacle may no longer b

The warning signal will stop

the vehicle moves away f

the outer sensors measur

seconds.

The signal will not be switche

nent tone area.

Registering the obstacle

Exterior front and rear sen

Front central sensors: from

Rear central sensors: from

Driving176

mall children or animals when reversing. The ble to detect them.

s be able to detect objects such as trailer draw

etc. This could result in damage to your car.

ing system works only at speeds of under

ing sensors in the bumpers must be kept clean

with pressure hoses and steam cleaners, the

ly briefly. A distance of 10 cm between the

nozzle must be observed.

ated via a tone when activated for the first time

ing in the button. Switch the system off at the

a qualified dealership as soon as possible.

y-fitted towing attachment41), the parking

t active when the reverse gear is engaged if you

ing system registers water as an obstacle.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 176 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Switching the parking distance warning system on and off

Switching on the parking distance warning system

The parking distance warning system is activated by either pressing the

button fig. 132 or by selecting the reverse gear. A warning lamp in the

button will indicate that the system is active.

Switching off the parking distance warning system

The parking distance warning system is switched off by pressing the button

(the warning lamp in the button goes out) or exceeding speeds of approx.

25 km/h.

WARNING

The parking distance warning system cannot replace the driver's assessment of the situation. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered.

Be particularly aware of s sensors may not always be a

Caution The system may not alway

bars, thin rails, fences, posts

The parking distance warn

approx. 15 km/h.

The parking distance warn

and free of ice. When cleaning

sensors should be sprayed on

sensors and the steam / hose

Note A system fault will be indic

and by the warning lamp flash

button and have it checked by

If your vehicle has a factor

distance warning system is no are towing a trailer.

The parking distance warn

Fig. 132 Detailed view of dash panel Control button for the parking distance warning system

41) Optional equipment

WARNING (continued)

Driving 177

Safety Fir Technical Data

ox: if the cruise control is activated the gearbox

ithout first releasing the clutch, as the the

d this may cause damage.

he CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. The

ts own weight. Reduce gears (with an automatic

the Tiptronic) or brake using the footbrake.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 177 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Cruise control system (CCS)

Cruise control operation

The cruise control system(CCS) is able to maintain the set

speed in the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.

Once the desired speed has been reached and the setting stored, you may

take your foot off the accelerator.

In vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox and in vehicles with an automatic

gearbox with the lever in positions P, N or R the cruise control does not

operate in first gear.

WARNING

It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system (CCS) if it is not possible to drive at constant speed.

Do not use the cruise control in heavy traffic or on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), as there is a risk of accident.

Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead to take the traffic situation into consideration. This is the duty of the driver. The cruise control system is merely an aid to the driver.

Never use the cruise control system when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. This feature is designed for use on paved roads only. Risk of accident.

Always switch off the CCS when you have finished using it. This will prevent you using it by mistake.

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions. This may cause an accident.

Caution Vehicles with a manual gearb

should not be set in neutral w

engine speed will increase an

Note When travelling down hills, t

vehicle will accelerate under i

gearbox, reduce gears using

Driving178

133 to the left to ON. The symbol

strument when the cruise control system

. 133 to the right to OFF or press the

nce.

of the rocker switch fig. 133 once

eached the speed you wish to set

peed is then stored and maintained.

d

eed hold down the upper part of the

fig. 133 or button fig. 134 .

ed hold down the lower part of the rocker

or button fig. 134 . The

le is no longer accelerating, not due to

the accelerator, the previously programmed

e accelerator pedal is released. This will not be

le speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the

minutes. The speed will have to be stored

AB

AA

AB

AB +

AB -

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 178 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Lever for cruise control

The CCS can be operated using the controls on the turn signal

lever or on the multi-function steering wheel.

Switching on the system

Move the control fig.

lights up in the combi-in

is switched on.

Switching off system

Move the control fig

key fig. 134 o

Setting speed

Press the lower part SET briefly when you have r

fig. 134 . This s

Increasing the stored spee

To reach the desired sp

rocker button

Reducing the set speed

To reach the desired spe

button fig. 133

speed falls as the vehic

sharp braking.

If you increase speed by using

speed will be resumed when th

the case, however, if the vehic

stored speed for longer than 5

again.

Fig. 133 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever control and rocker switch for cruise control

AA

AB

Fig. 134 Multifunction steering wheel: CCS controls

-

+

-

Driving 179

Safety Fir Technical Data

n, release the brake or clutch pedal, move the

button page 178, fig. 133 or button

speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.

+

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 179 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the

brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part

of the rocker switch or button .

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions. This may cause an accident.

Switching off system temporarily

Switching off the control temporarily in vehicles with a manual gearbox

Depress the brake or clutch pedal or

Push the switch page 178, fig. 133 to OFF, or

Press the lower part of the button .

Switching off the control temporarily in vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Press the brake pedal or

Select positions N or 1 or

Push the switch page 178, fig. 133 to OFF, or

Press the lower part of the rocker button .

The speed stored will remain in the memory if the control is switched off

temporarily, unless you select positions N or 1. In this case, the speed stored

in the memory will be deleted.

To resume the control functio

switch to ON or press the

page 178, fig. 134 once.

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set traffic or weather conditions

+

AA

CANCEL

AA

CANCEL

AA

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 180 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Intelligent technology 181

Safety Fir Technical Data

or the corresponding message appears on diately have the brake pads checked and pecialised workshop.

es on, this may be caused by the

e warning light comes on on the instrument

over 6 km/h with the hand brake on, a text

rations may appear on the instrument panel. In

eard.

t brake fluid the warning lamp lights up on

ame time, a text message or the necessary oper-

trument panel. Stop the vehicle immediately

ke fluid page 223.

he brake system the warning lamp lights up

three buzzes are emitted. At the same time, a

y operations may appear on the instrument

o not drive on. You should obtain professional

p can light up together with the anti-locking

.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 181 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Tips and Maintenance

Intelligent technology

Brakes

Brake servo

The brake servo supplements the pressure you exert on the brake pedal. It

works only when the engine is running.

If the brake servo does not operate, for example, when the vehicle is being

towed or due to a fault in the system, the brake pedal must be depressed

harder.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.

Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.

If the brake servo is out of action, for example if the car is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.

Brake pads wear display

If this light comes on, check the brake pads immediately.

At the same time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on

the instrument panel.

WARNING

If the warning lamp lights up the instrument panel, imme replaced, if necessary, at a s

Brake warning lamp

If the warning lamp com

following reasons:

With the handbrake on th

panel. If you are travelling at

message or the required ope

addition a warning signal is h

In the event of insufficien the instrument panel. At the s

ations may appear on the ins

and check the level of the bra

In the event of a fault in t on the instrument panel and

text message or the necessar

panel. Stop the vehicle and d

assistance. This warning lam

brake system warning lamp

Intelligent technology182

d of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic tra safety afforded by the system tempt you iving. Risk of accident.

her if you drive too fast, if you do not keep front, and when the road surface is slippery or risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist

annot defy the laws of motion. Slippery and n with the brake assist system!

cle or work carried out incorrectly (e.g. to the nning gear or any components affecting the t the efficiency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS

em (ABS)

em prevents the wheels locking

S) is an important part of the car's active safety

too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is

ill reduce the pressure for this wheel. The driver

process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and

rate warning to the driver that one or more of

nd the ABS control function has intervened. In

keep the brake pedal fully depressed so the

plication. Do not pump the brake pedal.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 182 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

WARNING

Special care must be taken when working on the engine or on components in the engine compartment.

It is important that you read and observe the corresponding warnings before working in the engine compartment page 211.

If the brake warning symbol does not go out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low or there is a fault in the brake system. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. You should obtain professional assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault corrected.

Brake assist system (BAS)

The brake servo (BAS) works only when the engine is running.

In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.

This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.

In these cases the brake assist servo comes into action: on activating the

brake pedal quickly, the assistant interprets this as an emergency. It then very

quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated

more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system

switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.

WARNING

Try to always adapt the spee conditions. Do not let the ex into taking any risks when dr

The risk of accident is hig your distance from the car in wet. The increased accident system.

The brake assist system c wet roads are dangerous eve

Modifications to the vehi engine, the brake system, ru wheels and tyres) could affec and lessen their efficiency.

Anti-locking brake syst

The anti-lock brake syst

during braking.

The anti-lock brake system (AB

system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels is turning

close to locking, the system w

is made aware of this control

audible noise. This is a delibe

the wheels is tending to lock a

this situation it is important to

ABS can regulate the brake ap

Intelligent technology 183

Safety Fir Technical Data

itors the ABS.

light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

after the system has run through an automatic

does not light up when the ignition is switched

ot go out again after a few seconds.

p when the vehicle is moving.

d in the normal way (except that the ABS control

ase take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as

e ESP warning lamp will also light up42).

ights up together with the brake warning lamp

ult in the ABS function, but also a possible fault

age or the necessary operations may appear on

hen working on the engine or on components

ead and observe the corresponding warnings e compartment page 211.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 183 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

On braking sharply on slippery ground, this system helps to keep the vehicle

under control, as the wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all

conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel

or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.

WARNING

Try to always adapt the speed of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety afforded by the system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Risk of accident.

The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of motion. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS has been activated, you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions.

The ABS cannot reduce the risk of accident if, for example, you are driving with an unsuitable load or too close to the preceding vehicle.

WARNING

Modifications to the vehicle or work carried out incorrectly (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS and lessen their efficiency.

The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted page 227.

ABS warning lamp

The warning lamp mon

The warning lamp should

switched on. It goes out again

test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The ABS warning lamp on.

The warning lamp does n

The warning lamp lights u

The vehicle can still be brake

function is out of action). Ple

soon as possible.

If a fault occurs in the ABS, th

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp l

, this indicates not only a fa

in the brake system .

At the same time, a text mess

the instrument panel.

WARNING

Special care must be taken w in the engine compartment.

It is important that you r before working in the engin

42) Optional equipment

Intelligent technology184

utomatically when the brake has cooled down.

d of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic tra safety afforded by the system tempt you iving. Risk of accident.

lippery surface, for example on ice and snow, ly. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may other- impair the car's stability.

g style to suit road conditions and the traffic

or work carried out incorrectly (e.g. to the nning gear or any components affecting the t the efficiency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS

programme (ESP)

ion programme helps to reduce the

ogramme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL and TCS

ne is running.

eft switched on at all times. Only when the

tained should the ESP be disconnected.

ains,

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 184 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir page 223. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. You should obtain professional assistance.

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS control function. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the tail of the vehicle to skid sideways. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the fault corrected.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-

tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.

The electronic differential lock (EDL) only works when the engine is running.

EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed of the driven wheels.

At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-

ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by

a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the

wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other

driven wheel via the differential.

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts

out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The car remains operational

and will behave in the same way as a car without EDL. For this reason, the

driver is not informed that the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again a

WARNING

Try to always adapt the spee conditions. Do not let the ex into taking any risks when dr

When accelerating on a s press the accelerator careful wise start to spin. This could

Always adapt your drivin situation.

WARNING

Modifications to the vehicle engine, the brake system, ru wheels and tyres) could affec and lessen their efficiency.

Electronic stabilisation

The electronic stabilisat

danger of skidding.

The electronic stabilisation pr

and only works when the engi

The ESP should generally be l

necessary drive can not be ob

For example:

when driving with snow ch

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 185

Safety Fir Technical Data

start flashing to indicate that the ESP and TCS

e driving condition.

ously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

ly if the ESP is switched off.

ult should occur in the ABS because the ESP

the ABS.

up and stays on after the engine is started, this

stem has temporarily switched off the function.

activated by switching the ignition off and then

goes out, this means the system is fully func-

, the warning lamp lights after turning the

off after a brief trip.

ed of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic tra safety afforded by the system tempt you riving. Risk of accident.

defy the laws of motion. This should be kept in ry and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

g style to suit the condition of the roads and

he risk of accident if, for example, you are ad or too close to the preceding vehicle.

icle or work carried out incorrectly (e.g. to the nning gear or any components affecting the ct the efficiency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 185 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,

when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for

example.

You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer

need wheel spin.

When the ESP is deactivated, the TCS is switched off at the same time. This

means that this technology is not available for as long as the ESP remains

switched off.

How ESP works

ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually. The

system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the

changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them

with the actual behaviour of the car. If the desired course is not being main-

tained accurately (for instance if the car is beginning to skid) the ESP compen-

sates automatically by applying the brake at the appropriate wheel.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the car back to a stable condi-

tion. If the car is tending to oversteer (break away at the rear) the brake appli-

cation is concentrated on the outside front wheel; if the car is understeering

(tending to follow a wider radius in a bend), the brake is mainly applied to the

inside rear wheel.

How the Traction Control System (TCS) works

TCS reduces engine power to help prevent the driven wheels of front-wheel

drive vehicles losing traction during acceleration. The system works in the

entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in

the ABS, the TCS will also be out of action. TCS helps the car to start moving,

accelerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may other-

wise be difficult or even impossible.

When does the warning lamp light up or flash ?

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and

should go out again after a few seconds.

The warning lamp will

are counteracting an unstabl

It will light up continu

It will light up continuous

It will also come on if a fa

operates in conjunction with

If the warning lamp lights

may mean that the control sy

In this case the ESP can be re

on again. If the warning lamp

tional

If the battery is disconnected

ignition on. This should turn

WARNING

Try to always adapt the spe conditions. Do not let the ex into taking any risks when d

The ESP and TCS cannot mind, particularly on slippe

Always adapt your drivin the traffic situation.

The ESP cannot reduce t driving with an unsuitable lo

WARNING

Modifications to the veh engine, the brake system, ru wheels and tyres) could affe and lessen their efficiency.

Intelligent technology186

istributed automatically to both axles

ns and how you drive.

, your car will have plenty of traction in winter

dard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend

front or rear wheel drive, winter tyres or all-

on all four wheels when winter road conditions

this will give a better braking response.

re mandatory, they must be fitted to the front

l drive.

ve, all four tyres should have the same amount

have the same rolling circumference.

ippery or wet surfaces. You could lose control o fast. This may result in serious injury.

hat you adjust your speed to suit the road and the extra safety afforded by four-wheel drive ks when driving.

s the vehicle good acceleration even in winter. rive vehicle handles in the same way as a

eels may start to aquaplane and lose ar is driven too fast. If this should happen, se in engine speed to warn the driver, as with

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 186 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

The effectiveness of the ESP is also determined by the tyres fitted page 227.

Caution In order to ensure that ESP and TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be

fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Power steering

Power steering does not work if the engine is not running or if the power

steering system has developed a fault. In this case the steering wheel is very

hard to turn.

Caution Do not keep the steering wheel in the full-lock position for longer than

15 seconds when the engine is running. This could cause damage to the

power steering system.

Four-wheel drive*

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the engine power is distrib-

uted to all four wheels

The four-wheel drive system is fully automatic and does not require interven-

tion by the driver. The engine power is permanently distributed to all four

wheels. The engine power is d

according to the road conditio

Winter tyres

Thanks to its four-wheel drive

conditions, even with the stan

that, in keeping with cars with

season tyres should be fitted

are expected, mainly because

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains a

wheels of cars with four-whee

Replacing tyres

In vehicles with four-wheel dri

of wear. All four wheels must

WARNING

Never drive too fast on icy, sl of your vehicle if you drive to

Therefore, it is essential t traffic conditions. Do not let tempt you into taking any ris

The four-wheel drive give When braking, a four-wheel d front drive vehicle.

On wet roads the front wh contact with the road if the c there will be no sudden increa a front-wheel drive car.

WARNING (continued)

Driving and the environment 187

Safety Fir Technical Data

rake pads

n-in carefully for the first 500 km. New

un-in carefully for the first 200 km.

can compensate for the reduced braking effect

the brake pedal. If you need to make an emer-

nce will be longer with new brake pads than with

run-in.

ximum grip to start with, and need running in. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500 km.

run in and do not have the correct friction 00 km. However, you can compensate for the ect by applying more pressure on the brake

ing distance

braking distance are influenced by

road conditions.

epends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate

ends to a great extent on the conditions under

and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often

ort distances or have a sporty driving style, we

e thickness of your brake pads checked by SEAT

recommended in the service schedule.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 187 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.

Up to 1,000 kilometres

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.

Do not use full throttle.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 km

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed

or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is

greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and its oil

consumption reduced.

Running in tyres and b

New tyres should be ru

brake pads should be r

During the first 200 km, you

by applying more pressure to

gency stop, the braking dista

brake pads which have been

WARNING

New tyres do not give ma This may cause an accident.

New brake pads must be properties during the first 2 slightly reduced braking eff pedal.

Braking effect and brak

The braking effect and

driving situations and

The efficiency of the brakes d

of wear of the brake pads dep

which the vehicle is operated

drive in town traffic, drive sh

recommend that you have th

Service more frequently than

Driving and the environment188

sion control system

of the catalytic converter

etrol.

dry.

do not replenish with too much engine oil

up engine oil .

o start it, use jump leads if necessary

running or loss of power when the vehicle is

iately and have the vehicle inspected at the

hese symptoms are communicated by the

age 72. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter

e into the environment. The catalytic converter

eating.

es very high temperatures! Fire hazard!

alytic converter could come into contact with terials under the vehicle.

nderseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the erter or the heat shields on the exhaust m the engine could ignite them.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 188 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in

heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the effect of the brakes is less-

ened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in this case, dry

the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times

WARNING

Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk of accidents.

New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km. The slightly reduced braking effect can be compen- sated for by increasing pressure on the brake pedal. This also applies when new brake pads are fitted.

If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than normal.

When driving downhill, the brakes work hard and get hot very quickly. Before driving down a long steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if your vehicle has automatic transmission). In this way you will make use of the engine braking effect and relieve the load on the brakes.

Never let the brakes rub by only applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and will increase the braking distance. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not work.

Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the notes page 204 before buying accessories.

If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Exhaust gas emis

Catalytic converter*

To conserve the useful life

Always use unleaded p

Do not run the fuel tank

For engine oil changes,

page 217, Topping

Never tow the vehicle t

page 250.

If you notice misfiring, uneven

moving, reduce speed immed

nearest qualified workshop. T

exhaust gas warning lamp p

the exhaust system and escap

can also be damaged by overh

WARNING

The catalytic converter reach

Never park where the cat dry grass or inflammable ma

Do not apply additional u exhaust pipes, catalytic conv system, because the heat fro

Driving and the environment 189

Safety Fir Technical Data

d for refuelling with mixtures of FAME fuel

ance with DIN 51628. The diesel particle filter

re percentage is exceeded.

nvironmentally friendly

nmentally friendly driving

ental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes

rt on your driving style. By adopting an econom-

ting the traffic situation ahead, you can easily

0-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce

are listed below.

the traffic situation

accelerating. By anticipating the situation, you

n and, therefore accelerate less. If it is possible,

r engaged, for example, if you see a red light

ieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of

and fuel consumption are reduced to zero

).

ergy

l is to change up through the gears quickly.

pm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 189 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank, in this case, the irregularity of the fuel supply

may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust

system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a

smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. This depends on

the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be reme-

died by changing to another brand of fuel.

Diesel engine particulate filter*

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced

by burning diesel.

The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas

system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If driving

conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short

trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the diesel engine

particulate filter warning lamp will light up.

WARNING

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Caution The vehicle is not designe

(biodiesel) over 7% in accord

will be damaged if this mixtu

Economical and e driving

Economical and enviro

Fuel consumption, environm

and tyres depends in large pa

ical driving style and anticipa

reduce fuel consumption by 1

pollution while saving money

As you drive try to anticipate

A vehicle uses most fuel when

are required to brake less ofte

let the vehicle roll with a gea ahead. The braking effect ach

brakes and tyres; emissions

(disconnection due to inertia

Change gear early to save en

An effective way of saving fue

Running the engine at high r

amount of fuel.

Driving and the environment190

sumption is proportionally higher. The engine

nsumption does not regularise until having

his is the reason why we recommend avoiding

sures

tyres at the correct pressure saves fuel. If the

o low, this can put the fuel consumption up by

eater rolling resistance, under-inflation also

irs handling.

ays be checked when the tyres are cold.

ough the year: they will increase fuel consump-

put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth

tment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-

orted.

ce for the sake of convenience, even when it is

of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%

tra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier

ator, which produces electricity. With the need

n is also increased. Because of this, always

hen you do not need them. Examples of equip-

ty are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 190 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We

recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon

reaching 2,000 rpms.

Automatic gearbox: Accelerate in moderation and avoid the kick-down (full

throttle) position.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel

consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at

higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level

crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only

30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the

engine.

The engine takes a very long time to warm up when it is running at idling

speed. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high

during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately

after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you

will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced

engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum

reliability and an enhanced resale value.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and

the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.

With the engine cold, fuel con

does not warm up and fuel co

driven some four kilometres. T

short trips wherever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pres

Bear in mind that keeping the

tyre pressures are just 1 bar to

as much as 5 %. Due to the gr

increases tyre wear and impa

The tyre pressures should alw

Do not use winter tyres all thr

tion by up to 10 %.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Every kilo of extra weight will

checking the luggage compar

essary loads are being transp

A roof carrier is often left in pla

no longer needed. At a speed

more fuel as a result of the ex

even when it is not in use.

Save electrical energy

The engine activates the altern

for electricity, fuel consumptio

turn off electrical equipment w

ment that use a lot of electrici

heating or the seat heaters*.

Driving and the environment 191

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing must be taken into consideration:

atalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is

the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-

out service station networks selling unleaded

ssible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-

are not available or that the Authorised Service

ited repairs.

ors will gladly provide information about the

vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance

dlights

nd drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or

pped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming

t apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight

available from your Authorised Service

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 191 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Environmental friendliness

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials

and production of your new Seat.

Design measures for economical recycling

Joints and connections designed for ease of dismantling

Modular construction to facilitate dismantling

Increased use of single-grade materials

Plastic parts and elastomers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,

ISO 11469 and ISO 1629

Choice of materials

Nearly all materials used can be recycled

Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling

Recycled materials used in manufacture

Reduction of volatile compounds in plastics

CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioning

Compliance with prohibited materials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,

mercury, chrome VI.

Manufacturing methods

Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts

Solvent-free cavity sealing

Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit

Solvent-free adhesives

No CFCs used in production

Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building

materials

Overall water consumption reduced

Heat recovery systems

Water-soluble paint

Driving abroad

Notes

For driving abroad, the follow

For vehicles fitted with a c

available for the journey. See

tions will have information ab

fuel.

In some countries it is po

tions where some spare parts

Centre may only carry out lim

SEAT importers and distribut

technical preparation of your

and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for hea

If you have to drive a right-ha

vice versa, the asymmetric di

traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you mus

lenses. Further information is

Centre.

Driving and the environment192

t is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus

trailer. If the maximum permissible trailer

eight of the vehicle may have to be reduced.

o that heavy objects are as near to the axle as

trailer must be secured to prevent them

um permitted pressure shown on the sticker on

t the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in accord-

urer's recommendations.

ough of the road behind the trailer with the

the case you should have additional mirrors

ould be mounted on hinged extension

give sufficient vision to the rear.

ght may dazzle other drivers. Use the headlight

e of light. If you do not have headlight range

djusted by a qualified dealership.

a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.

rivers, adjust the dipped beam according to ay occur.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 192 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Trailer towing

What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?

The vehicle can, if suitably equipped, be used to tow a trailer or caravan.

If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have

the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements

for towing a trailer. If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket page 206.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection

between the trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug, you will need to use an adapter cable. This is

available from SEAT Service.

Trailer weight / draw bar loading

Never exceed the maximum permitted trailer weights. If you do not load the

trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb corre-

spondingly steeper gradients.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to

1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and

therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced

air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The

weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for

every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). Where possible, operate the trailer

with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing

bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.

The figures for trailer weights and draw bar weights given on the data plate

of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct figures

for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for the towing

bracket, are given in the registration documents and Technical data.

Gross combination weight

The gross combination weigh

the actual weight of the laden

weight is to be utilized, the w

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer s

possible. Loads carried in the

moving.

Tyre pressure

Set tyre pressure to the maxim

the inside of the tank flap. Se

ance with the trailer manufact

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see en

standard mirrors. If this is not

fitted. Both exterior mirrors sh

brackets. Adjust the mirrors to

Headlight adjustment

If towing a trailer the dipped li

range control to lower the con

control, have the headlights a

WARNING

Never transport people in

To avoid dazzling other d the load. If not, an accident m

Driving and the environment 193

Safety Fir Technical Data

et from the luggage compartment

ng the key fig. 135 clockwise.

pletely in the direction of the arrow

he maximum.

towing bracket is pretensed.

cket.

the luggage compartment

g bracket.

et in its casing on the right-hand side of

ent. The bracket engages and the tension

ly fitted.

with instructions on fitting and removing the

racket.

s possible to store the cover of the tow-bar in a

pling must be stored securely to prevent it icle and causing injury.

ing bracket is being fitted, there is a risk of heel goes back on itself.

A1

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 193 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Note Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom-

mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the

vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.

Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your

country.

Ball coupling of towing bracket

The removable ball coupling of the towing bracket is stored

with the tools on board behind the right-hand side trim of the

luggage compartment.

It is necessary to first tense the towing bracket removing the ball

coupling

Remove the towing brack

Open the lock by turni

Take out the wheel com

and turn clockwise to t

Release the wheel. The

Remove the towing bra

Storing towing bracket in

First tension the towin

Place the towing brack

the luggage compartm

is released .

Check that it is correct

The ball coupling is provided

ball coupling of the towing b

If the ball coupling is fitted it

plastic bag next to the tools.

WARNING

The towing bracket ball cou being flung through the veh

When the pretensed tow injury in the event that the w

Fig. 135 Location of towing bracket

Driving and the environment194

during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear

s monitor the temperature indicator for the

am

n towing a trailer. The ESP makes it easier to

snake.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 194 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed and

it obscures the number plate.

When placing the towing bracket in the casing check that it is no longer

tensed and securely fastened.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very

unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow

for the unbalanced weight distribution.

Speed

The stability of the car and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For this

reason it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible top speed in

unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially when

driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest

sign of snaking. Never try to stop the snaking by increasing speed.

Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the

brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be

caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear (in both manual and

automatic gearboxes) in good time before going down a steep hill. This

enables you to use the engine braking effect to slow down the vehicle.

Overheating

At very high temperatures and

and high engine speed, alway

coolant.

Electronic Stabilisation Progr

Do not switch off the ESP whe

stabilise if the trailer starts to

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 195

Safety Fir Technical Data

ain products may produce noxious vapours; l ventilated areas.

e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. There is a fire / explo-

hicle, or carry out any maintenance, switch off rake firmly and remove the key from the igni-

, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.

e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the

hicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of

nvironment products, try to select ones which are not

should not be disposed of with ordinary house-

osal information on the package.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 195 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle

General notes

Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your

vehicle.

Regular care

Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may

also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the

event of corrosion or paint defects.

The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to

wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects, bird drop-

pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt

and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they

do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)

further intensify the corrosive effect.

After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the

underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Car care products

Car care products are available from your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the

product instructions until you have used up the product.

WARNING

Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep out of children's reach. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or

your vehicle. The use of cert these should be used in wel

Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion risk.

Before you wash your ve the engine, apply the handb tion.

Caution Never attempt to remove dirt

Never use a dry cloth or spong

paintwork or glass on your ve

water.

For the sake of the e When purchasing car care

harmful to the environment.

Left over car care products

hold waste. Observe the disp

WARNING (continued)

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle196

ughly with water.

ehicle gently using a chamois leather.

er seals and the surfaces they touch with

freezing. Apply silicone spray to the

en braking directly after washing the

s by braking several times.

be switched off before the vehicle is washed.

rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of

the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk

irt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is

onge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch

r vehicle.

temperatures: if the vehicle is rinsed with a

into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the

or bonnet. Otherwise there is a risk of malfunc-

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 196 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Care of the vehicle exterior

Automatic car washes

The paint is so durable that the car can normally be washed without problems

in an automatic car wash. However, the effect on the paint depends to a large

extent on the design of the car wash, the brushes used, the filtering of the

wash water and the type of detergents and wax solutions used, etc.

After the car has been washed, the brakes could respond later than normal as

the brake discs and brake pads will be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the

brakes by braking several times.

WARNING

Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident.

Washing by hand

Washing the vehicle

First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off.

Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Start on

the roof and work your way down. Use only light pressure.

Rinse the sponge or glove as much as possible.

Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.

Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. last using a different sponge or

glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoro

Dry the surface of the v

If it is cold, dry the rubb

a cloth to prevent them

rubber seals.

After cleaning the vehicle

If possible, avoid sudd

vehicle. Dry the brake

WARNING

The ignition must always

Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.

Moisture, ice and salt on of accident.

Caution Never attempt to remove d

dry. Never use a dry cloth or sp

the paintwork or glass on you

Washing the vehicle in low

hose, do not direct the water

doors, luggage compartment,

tion.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 197

Safety Fir Technical Data

concentrated jet or cylindrical jet (rotating ing distances and short cleaning times, visible cur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk

an 60C. This could damage the car.

hicle, maintain a sufficient distance from sensi-

xible hoses, plastic, sound proofing, etc. This is

pers painted in the same colour as the vehicle.

surface, the greater the wear on the material.

s the paintwork.

r car if water does not form small drops and run

lean.

ilable from your Authorised Service Centre.

rotects the paintwork from environmental

t is also effective in protecting against minor

regularly in the car wash, it is advisable to

of hard wax at least twice a year.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 197 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

For the sake of the environment In the interests of environmental protection, the car should be washed only

in specially provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water

entering the sewerage system. In some districts, washing vehicles anywhere

else may be prohibited.

Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,

particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted

bumpers.

Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from

windows page 198.

Never use concentrated jet nozzles or so-called dirt blasters

.

If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the

vehicle. Dry the brakes by braking several times.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a nozzle). Even at large spray and invisible damage can oc

Moisture, ice and salt on of accident.

Caution Do not use water hotter th

To avoid damage to the ve

tive materials for example: fle

especially important for bum

The closer the nozzle is to the

Waxing the car

Regular waxing protect

You need to apply wax to you

off the paintwork when it is c

Good quality hard wax is ava

A good coat of wax helps to p

contaminants page 195. I

scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used

protect the paint with a coat

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle198

exterior mirrors

ith commercially available, alcohol based

clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

ove snow from the windows and mirrors.

eather to dry the windows. Chamois leathers

ted surfaces are not suitable for use on

ith wax deposits which would smear the

y to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push

t move it to and fro.

ne remover to clean off rubber, oil, grease and

ved with a special cleaner which is available

Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could

er. A window cleanser specifically for removing

ring if added to the windscreen washer fluid.

ll not remove wax deposits.

ter to remove snow and ice from windows and

glass to crack!

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 198 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot

be brought back by applying wax. Polish can be obtained from your Author-

ised Service Centre.

The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax

compounds to seal the paint page 197, Waxing the car.

Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or

on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

Solvents will damage plastic parts.

If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with special solvent- free plastic cleaning and care products.

Caution The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle may

damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.

Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cleaning windows and

Cleaning the windows

Moisten the windows w

glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a

Removing snow

Use a small brush to rem

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois l

which have been used on pain

windows. They will be soiled w

windows.

If possible use a de-icing spra

it in one direction only. Do no

Use window cleaner or a silico

silicone deposits.

Wax deposits have to be remo

from your Authorised Service

cause the wiper blades to judd

wax will stop the blades judde

Grease removing cleansers wi

Caution Never use warm or hot wa

mirrors. This could cause the

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 199

Safety Fir Technical Data

can freeze up in winter.

ou should only use spray with lubricating and

th a damp cloth.

ith a soft, dry cloth.

ying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning ducts will remove stains and coatings from the

surfaces:

re product on chrome.

ome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

ust from alloy wheels.

ent to clean the wheels.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 199 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the

window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating elements on

the inside of the window.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades are essential for clear vision.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen

wiper blades.

2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use

a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.

Care of rubber seals

If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so

quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.

The weather strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain

pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for

example silicone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The

doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not

freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinders

The door lock cylinders

To de-ice the lock cylinders y

anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts wi

2. Polish chrome parts w

If this does not provide satisf

product. Chrome cleaning pro

surface.

Caution To prevent scratching chrome

Never use an abrasive ca

Do not clean or polish chr

Cleaning alloy wheels

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake d

Use an acid free deterg

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle200

ti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, t shields on the exhaust system. The heat of gine could cause them to ignite! This is a fire

partment

cleaning the engine compartment.

the surface of the power unit are given anti-

tory.

articularly important in winter when the car is

ads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,

t should be thoroughly cleaned before and

e is able to provide the correct cleaning and

he necessary equipment. For this reason, we

performed by them.

is usually removed if the engine compartment

g solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.

ould ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and

partment are given anti-corrosion treatment

ine compartment, always observe the safety

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 200 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Every three months

Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. It is

important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at

regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels.

Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. If the protective

coating is damaged, e.g. by stone impact, the damaged area should be

repaired immediately.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle. Dry the brakes by braking several times.

Underbody sealant

The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect it from corro-

sion and damage.

The protective coating could be damaged when driving. We recommend that

the protective coating under the body and on the running gear should be

checked, and reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.

We recommend that repair work and additional anti-corrosion work is carried

out by your Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or an catalytic converter or the hea the exhaust system or the en hazard.

Cleaning the engine com

Take special care when

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and

corrosion treatment at the fac

Good corrosion protection is p

frequently driven on salted ro

the entire engine compartmen

after the salting period.

Your Authorised Service Centr preserving products and has t

recommend having this work

The anti-corrosion protection

is cleaned with grease removin

If this job is carried out, you sh

components in the engine com

afterwards.

WARNING

When working in the eng warnings page 211.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 201

Safety Fir Technical Data

nd surface of the airbag module with cleansers ts cause the surface to become porous. If the ng plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.

tain solvents will damage the material.

with a clean cloth moistened with water.

satisfactory results, use a gentle soap

tain solvents will damage the material.

ers and fabric trim

im on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned

er or with dry foam and a soft brush.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 201 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition before you open the bonnet.

Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.

Do not clean the underside of vehicle, wheel arches without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.

Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle.

Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!

For the sake of the environment Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.

The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason,

engine washing should be carried out only by a qualified workshop or a suit-

able filling station.

Care of the vehicle interior

Cleaning plastic parts and the dash panel

Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash

panel.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special

solvent-free plastic cleaning product.

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel a containing solvents. Solven airbag inflates, disintegrati

Caution Cleaning products which con

Cleaning wooden trim*

Clean the wooden trim

If this does not provide

solution.

Caution Cleaning products which con

Cleaning cloth seat cov

Cloth seat covers and fabric tr

with a special interior cleans

WARNING (continued)

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle202

ght to prevent it from fading. However, slight

ity natural leather are normal.

olish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar

n stains should be removed by a qualified

seat belt working properly.

nd check all seat belts regularly.

eat belt right out and leave it out.

ts with a gentle soap solution.

ic to dry.

belt until it is dry.

s the belt will not retract correctly into the auto-

ning agents on the seat belts, as this can bbing. Ensure that the belts do not come into

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 202 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Cleaning leather*

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the

leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution

(pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

and a cloth.

Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the

seams.

Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

Leather care

The leather should be treated regularly (about twice a year) with

a special leather-care product, which is available from your

Authorised Service Centre.

Apply these products very sparingly.

Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

SEAT does everything possible to preserve the special qualities of leather, as

a natural product. Because of the natural properties of the specially selected

hides employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and

dirt, etc. so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking

after the leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If

the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather should be

protected against direct sunli

colour variations in high-qual

Caution Do not use solvents, wax p

products on leather.

To avoid damage, stubbor

workshop.

Cleaning seat belts

A dirty belt may stop the

Keep the seat belts clean a

Cleaning seat belts

Carefully pull the dirty s

Clean the dirty seat bel

Allow the seat belt fabr

Do not roll up the seat

If large stains form on the belt

matic belt retractor.

WARNING

Do not use chemical clea impair the strength of the we contact with corrosive fluids.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 203

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 203 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.

Caution After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.

Otherwise the belt retractors could become damaged.

Cleaning the cool/thermos box

Before using the insulated box for the first time, you should clean

it, using a household detergent.

Always clean the inside of the insulated box when it is soiled.

If you do not plan to use the insulated box for a long period, disconnect the

power supply and clean the inside and outside of the box. Place a folded

towel between the box and its lid. This prevents mould and damp stains

forming in the cooling and heating box.

WARNING (continued)

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications204

CE mark (European Union manufacturer

phone holders or drink holders, should never within the working range of, the airbags. If resulting injury if the airbag is triggered in an

ys be carried out according to our

the electronic components or software in the

ns. Due to the way the electronic components

s, other systems may be affected by the faults.

ty, lead to excessive wear of components, and

gistration documents.

es cannot be held liable for any damage

or work performed incorrectly.

d that all work should be performed by an

ng genuine and SEAT approved parts and

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 204 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications

Accessories and parts

Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before

purchasing accessories and parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical

changes to your car, we recommend that you consult your Authorised Service

Centre.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information

about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-

turer regarding accessories and parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in

question is suitable, reliable and safe. Authorised Service Centres have the

necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are installed correctly

and professionally.

Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the

reliability, safety and suitability of parts not approved by SEAT. For this reason

SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if

these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered

by an official approval certificate.

Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the

vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-

controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and

bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to

control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator

fan, etc.), these must bear the

conformity declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers of, or they are, there is a danger of accident.

Modifications

Modifications must alwa

specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to

vehicle may cause malfunctio

are linked together in network

This can seriously impair safe

also invalidate your vehicle re

SEAT Authorised Service Centr

caused by modifications and/

For this reason, we recommen

Authorised Service Centre usi

accessories.

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 205

Safety Fir Technical Data

Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-

h a transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.

tion concerning the technical possibilities for

ay radios should be fitted only by a qualified

thorised Service Centre.

arily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.

ne mountings to the surfaces covering the ge of the airbags, danger of injury if the airbag

ones or two-way radios in the vehicle without agnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed applies to external aerials that have not been

conditions could cause the electronics to

on causes of faults are:

installed,

ess of 10 watts.

instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 205 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.

Roof aerial*

The vehicle may be fitted with a collapsible roof aerial* with antitheft

system*, which can be folded backwards, when, for example, going through

an automatic carwash.

To fold

Unscrew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards into a horizontal position and then

screw in again.

To return to working position

Continue in the reverse order to that given in the previous instruction.

Mobile telephones and two-way radios

You will require an external aerial for mobile phones and two-

way radios.

SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with mobile telephones and two-way

radios providing the following conditions are observed:

The correct installation of an external aerial,

transmitting power of maximum 10 watts.

An external aerial is needed to give the equipment its optimal range.

First consult your Authorised

phone or a two-way radio wit

Here you will receive informa

retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-w

workshop, for example an Au

WARNING

Always concentrate prim driving you could have an ac

Never attach the telepho airbag units or within the ran is triggered.

If you use mobile teleph an external aerial, electrom authorised limits. This also correctly installed.

Caution Failure to observe the above

malfunction. The most comm

no external aerial,

external aerial incorrectly

transmitting power in exc

Note Please observe the operating

radio.

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications206

Fig. 136 Attachment points for towing bracket

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 206 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Retrofitting a towing bracket

The vehicle can be retrofitted with a towing bracket.

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 207

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 207 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

If a towing bracket is to be retro-fitted to the car, it must be done according to

the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket page 206, fig. 136 are

underneath the vehicle.

Always observe the minimum distance from the middle of the ball coupling to

the ground (350 to 420 mm). This also applies when the vehicle is fully laden,

including maximum drawbar load.

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer implies additional work for the vehicle. Therefore,

before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre

to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

Observe the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-

rate pilot lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper must be removed and

reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts have to be tightened using a

torque wrench, and a socket connected to the vehicle's electrical system. This

requires specialist knowledge and tools.

The figures in the illustration show the dimensions and attachment points

which must be observed if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, it should be done by a qualified dealer.

If the towing bracket is incorrectly fitted, this could cause a safety risk.

For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the towing bracket.

Caution If the connector socket is not fitted correctly, this could cause damage to the

vehicle's electrical system.

AA

Checking and refilling levels208

observed when transporting a reserve e do not recommend carrying a spare fuel anister could be damaged in an accident and

pty on vehicles equipped with a catalytic

pply could cause misfiring. In this way the fuel

exhaust system, which could cause the cata-

amage.

ed from the vehicle paint finish as quickly as

herwise be damaged. Especially if biodiesel

9.

vironment operated correctly, it will switch itself off as

er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will

el may leak out if ambient conditions are

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 208 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Checking and refilling levels

Refilling

The tank filler neck is located at the rear right-hand side of the vehicle.

The tank flap is locked and unlocked automatically by the central locking

system.

The fuel tank holds about 70 litres.

The tank cap can, once unscrewed, be hung on the tank flap fig. 137.

After filling up, screw the tank cap back in firmly and close the tank flap until

it engages.

WARNING

All legal stipulations must be supply. For safety reasons, w canister in the vehicle. The c leak.

Caution Never run the fuel tank em

converter. An irregular fuel su

can arrive without burning the

lyser to overheat resulting in d

Spilt fuel should be remov

possible as the paint could ot

fuel is being used page 20

For the sake of the en If the automatic filler nozzle is

soon as the tank is full. Nev

fill the expansion chamber. Fu

warm.

Fig. 137 Tank filler neck and tank flap

Checking and refilling levels 209

Safety Fir Technical Data

ll throttle can damage the engine when using

ower than the correct grade for the engine.

nvironment el would seriously impair the efficiency of the

to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It

CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates

sel fuel.

age 208.

ly with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.

r obtained from rapeseed oil.

tion for Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.,

te.

.

viation Fatty Acid Methyl Ester

re can also be consulted to know if the vehicle

sel use.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 209 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Petrol types

The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel

tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be

used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = European Norm).

Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON

= Regulation Octane Number, unit for determining the knock resistance of

petrol). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recom-

mended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel

consumption and engine power. If, in exceptional circumstances, the correct

octane rating is not available:

For engines which require Premium unleaded petrol (95 RON) the

following is valid: Regular unleaded fuel with 91 RON can also be used. This

can, however, result in a slight loss of power under certain driving conditions.

For engines which require Premium unleaded petrol (98 RON) the

following is valid: Premium unleaded fuel with 95 RON can also be used. This

can, however, result in a slight loss of power under certain driving conditions.

If premium unleaded petrol is not available, the engine can be run on

regular unleaded petrol with 91 RON as an emergency measure. In this

case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Avoid using full

throttle. Fill up with premium petrol as soon as possible.

Caution Petrol that follows EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.

However, the so-called bioethanol fuels available at commercial establish-

ments with reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,

may not be used, as they will damage the fuel system.

Even one tankfull of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency

of the catalytic converter.

High engine speed and fu

petrol with an octane rating l

For the sake of the e Just one full tank of leaded fu

catalytic converter.

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must correspond

must have a cetane number (

the ignition quality of the die

Notes on filling with fuel p

RME fuel*

The biodiesel fuel must comp

Biodiesel is a methyleste

DIN is a German abbrevia

the German standards institu

EN means European Norm

FAME is the English abbre

Your Authorised Service Cent

has been prepared for biodie

Checking and refilling levels210

nter.

iesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at

e the fuel thickens due to wax separation. For

sel fuel is available in some countries during

d at temperatures as low as -22C.

atic conditions the diesel fuel sold generally

racteristics. Check with an Authorised Service

country concerned regarding the type of diesel

l filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for

res that the fuel system remains operational to

se winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15C.

to such an extent that the engine will not start

C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for

inners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.

system

stem raises the calorific capacity of the heating

d outside temperatures are very low. The

connects and disconnects automatically.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 210 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel)

The performance of a vehicle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.

Fuel consumption of a vehicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.

RME fuel can be used in winter at temperatures down to approx. -10C.

At outside temperatures below -10C, we recommend using winter diesel

fuel.

Your vehicle is designed to be refuelled with up to a maximum of 7%

blended biodiesel in accordance with standard DIN 51628.

Caution RME fuel can damage the fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably

adjusted.

If you decide to use biodiesel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel

which is DIN E 14,214 compliant.

If you use biodiesel that does not meet the required standard, the fuel

filter could become clogged.

Note In case of low exterior temperatures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of

higher than 50%, an increase in gas emission may occur during operation of

the independent heating.

The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For

this reason, we recommend that, about every 300 or 400 km, following a fuel

change, also change the fuel filter. Also note the instructions in the Inspec-

tion and Maintenance plan.

If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks, we

recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in

order to avoid damage to the injection system.

Winter driving

Diesel can thicken in wi

Winter-grade diesel

When using summer-grade d

sub-zero temperatures becaus

this reason, winter-grade die

the cold months. It can be use

In countries with different clim

has different temperature cha

Centre or filling stations in the

fuels available.

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fue

operation in winter. This ensu

approx. -24C, provided you u

However, if the fuel has waxed

at temperatures of under -24

a while.

Caution Do not mix fuel additives (th

Supplementary heating

The supplementary heating sy

while the engine is running an

supplementary heating system

Checking and refilling levels 211

Safety Fir Technical Data

n the engine compartment unless you know

obs and have the correct tools! Have the work

rkshop if you are uncertain.

ables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and

ly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of

Service Centres concerning modifications. For

at you have service fluids and consumables

rvice Centre. Please observe the relevant

e engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a

the engine compartment, e.g. checking and anger of injury and scalding as well as the risk

f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining eam or coolant is emitted, then allow the lly opening the bonnet.

d remove the key from the ignition.

d move the gear stick to neutral or selector

the vehicle.

arts. There is a risk of burns.

ot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This

uits in the electrical system, particularly at the are attached page 250. The battery could

fan. It is temperature controlled and could en the engine has been switched off and the

on!

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 211 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

The exhaust fumes produced are eliminated through an exhaust pipe below

the vehicle.

Note For short journeys, very low outside temperatures and a percentage of

biodiesel fuel of over 50 % too much smoke may be produced.

Every time the engine is switched off, the fan continues to operate for a

short time in order to more quickly cool the heater. When refuelling it is not

necessary to wait until the fan stops operating.

Working in the engine compartment

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the

engine must be carried out cautiously.

Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-

ment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear stick to neutral or the selector lever to position P.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet page 99.

You should not do any work i

exactly how to carry out the j

carried out by a qualified wo

All service fluids and consum

batteries, are being constant

information to the Authorised

this reason we recommend th

replaced by an Authorised Se

instructions page 204. Th

hazardous area .

WARNING

All work on the engine or in refilling fluids, involves the d of accident or fire.

Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme burns. Wait until no more st engine to cool before carefu

Switch off the engine an

Apply the handbrake an lever to position P.

Keep children away from

Never touch hot engine p

Never spill liquids on a h is a fire hazard.

Avoid causing short-circ points where the jump leads explode.

Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh key removed from the igniti

Checking and refilling levels212

nguisher on hand.

service fluids, make absolutely certain that you

servoirs. Failure to observe this point will result

ngine damage!

vironment ul to the environment. For this reason you

n the ground underneath your vehicle. If you

, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 212 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!

Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.

Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.

If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following points:

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.

Always think carefully about pressing the accelerator if a gear is engaged in either an automatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo- nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings:

Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

Do not smoke.

Never work near naked flames.

Always have a fire exti

Caution When changing or topping up

fill the fluids into the correct re

in serious malfunctions and e

For the sake of the en Service fluids leaks are harmf

should make regular checks o

find spots of oil or other fluids

workshop.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 213

Safety Fir Technical Data

et, make sure that the windscreen wiper

he windscreen. Failure to do so could

pull the lever under the dashboard

tion indicated (arrow). The bonnet is

.

nd press the unlock button fig. 139 in

ow.

e point where it is held open by the gas

f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt.

, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, net.

ort rod is inserted securely and properly in the

ine compartment, always observe the safety

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 213 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Opening the bonnet

The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.

Before you open the bonn

arms are in contact with t

damage the paintwork.

Opening the bonnet

To release the bonnet,

fig. 138 in the direc

unlocked by a spring

Gently lift the bonnet a

the direction of the arr

Open the bonnet to th

struts.

WARNING

Hot coolant can scald!

Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme

Wait until no more steam then carefully open the bon

Make sure that the supp holder in the open bonnet.

When working in the eng warnings page 211.

Fig. 138 Detail of foot- well area on driver's side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.

Fig. 139 Detail of radi- ator grille: lever for unlocking the bonnet.

Checking and refilling levels214

s

st conform with exact specifications.

ial, high quality, multi grade oil that can be

r except for those regions affected by extreme

is necessary for the correct operation and long

n it becomes necessary to replenish or change

complies to the VW standards.

onforming to the VW standards then oil

I standards with an appropriate viscosity at

uld be used instead. The use of this type of oil

on the performance of the engine for example,

consumption and a higher emission level.

ferent oils may be mixed as long as they all

rds) set out in the following page should

service oil; the container will display together

rol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 214 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Closing the bonnet

Closing the bonnet

1. To close the bonnet, pull it down to overcome the gas strut pres-

sure.

2. Make sure that the bonnet catches onto its clasp. Do not press

down .

If the bonnet does not close properly, open it again and close it properly.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.

If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.

Engine oil

Engine oil specification

The engine oil used mu

Specifications

The engine comes with a spec

used in all seasons of the yea

cold.

As the use of good quality oil

service life of the engine, whe

the oil, always use an oil that

If it is not possible to find oil c

conforming to the ACEA or AP

atmospheric temperature sho

may have some repercussions

long starting time, increased

If a top up is required then dif

conform to the VW standards.

The specifications (VW standa

appear on the container of the

the different standards for pet

both types of engines.

Checking and refilling levels 215

Safety Fir Technical Data

s selected according to the diagram.

re falls outside the limits of the scale for a short

equired.

climate that is constantly very cold or very

mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration

not covered by the warranty.

4 00

7 00/ VW 506 01

6 01

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 215 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Oil properties

Viscosity

The viscosity class of the oil i

When the ambient temperatu

period, an oil change is not r

Mono-grade oil

Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to

ranges of viscosity43).

These oils are only useful in a

warm.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be

caused by these additives is

Fig. 140 Types of oil according to temperature

Engine type Specification

Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 50

Diesel VW 505 00/ VW 505 01/ VW 50

Diesel Injector Pump a)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 50

Diesel Injector Pump Motor 118 kWa) VW 506 01/ VW 507 00

Diesel Engines with Particulate filter (DPF)a) VW 507 00

43) Viscosity: oil density

Checking and refilling levels216

cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as

ut again and check the oil level.

ushing it in as far as it will go.

141 , you must not top up with oil.

u may top up with oil (approx. 0,5 l).

u must top up with oil (approx. 1,0 l).

onsume a certain amount of oil. Consumption

0 km. For this reason the engine oil level must

s, preferably when filling the tank and before a

ard, for instance during sustained high-speed

when towing a trailer or climbing on mountain

eferably be kept within area (but not above).

hen working on the engine or on components

ine compartment, always observe the safety

a do not start the engine. This could result

catalytic converter. Contact SEAT Service

AA

AA

AA

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 216 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the

corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Checking the engine oil level

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings

page 211.

Park the vehicle on an even surface.

Stop the engine and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back

into the sump.

Raise the bonnet page 213.

Pull out the dipstick.

Wipe the dipstick with a

far as it will go.

Then pull the dipstick o

Replace the dipstick, p

If the oil level is in area fig.

If the oil level is in area , yo

If the oil level is in area , yo

It is normal for the engine to c

can be up to 1.0 litres per 1,00

be checked at regular interval

journey.

When the engine is working h

motorway cruising in summer,

passes, the oil level should pr

WARNING

Special care must be taken w in the engine compartment.

When working in the eng warnings page 211.

Caution If the oil level is above the are

in damage to the engine and

Centre.

Fig. 141 Dipstick

AB

AC

Checking and refilling levels 217

Safety Fir Technical Data

ge 214.

nsure that no oil comes into contact with hot pping up.

ea do not start the engine. This could result

catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-

nvironment bove area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in

er and escape into the atmosphere via the

changed at the intervals given in the

the engine oil changed by an Authorised

ntervals are shown in the Inspection and Main-

if you have the specialist knowledge required!

AA

AA

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 217 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Topping up engine oil

Top up gradually with small quantities of oil.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on

page 211.

Unscrew cap from oil filler opening fig. 142.

Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.

To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using

small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before

adding any more oil.

As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.

The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine

compartment diagram page 262.

Engine oil specification pa

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! E engine components when to

Caution If the oil level is above the ar

in damage to the engine and

shop.

For the sake of the e The oil level must never be a

through the crankcase breath

exhaust system.

Changing engine oil

The engine oil must be

service schedule.

We recommend that you have

Service Centre.

The two different oil change i

tenance Plan.

WARNING

Only change the oil yourself

Fig. 142 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

AB

Checking and refilling levels218

ater and at least 40% coolant addi-

led with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of

an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F

e gives the necessary frost protection down to

arts of the cooling system against corrosion. It

es the boiling point of the coolant.

ust always be at least 40% - even if frost

quired in very cold climates, the proportion of

can be increased. However, the percentage of

xceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost

ce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%

protection to approx. -40C.

xic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the al container which should be stored out of the pplies to coolant which you have drained off.

+ must be added in sufficient quantities to n at the coldest ambient temperatures that y cold ambient temperatures, the coolant icle to breakdown. As the heater would also

ere is a risk of suffering exposure!

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 218 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings page 211, Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment.

Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.

Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil.

When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- zontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children until it is disposed of.

Caution No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine

damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be

covered by the factory warranty.

For the sake of the environment Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and

specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil

and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre.

Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.

Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large

enough to hold all the engine oil

Coolant

Coolant specifications

Coolant is a mixture of w

tive.

The cooling system must be fil

our coolant additive G 12+ or

(it is dyed purple). This mixtur

-25C and protects the alloy p

also prevents scaling and rais

The concentration of coolant m

protection is not required.

If greater frost protection is re

the antifreeze additive G 12+

coolant additives should not e

protection. It would also redu

coolant additive will give frost

WARNING

The coolant additive is to coolant additive in the origin reach of children. The same a

The coolant additive G 12 provide anti-freeze protectio can be expected. At extremel could freeze, causing the veh not work in this situation, th

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 219

Safety Fir Technical Data

nsion tank

nd allow it to cool.

ver the cap on the expansion tank with a

ly unscrew the cap .

lant expansion tank and read off the

th the MIN mark, top up with coolant.

AX mark.

sion tank

n tightly.

pansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding

page 262.

eets the required specifications page 218.

additive if coolant additive G 12+, is not avail-

ter and bring the coolant concentration back up

s possible by putting in the specified additive

nt.

ark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced

en the engine is hot.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 219 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Caution Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. The

resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant,

causing serious damage to the engine.

The coolant additive G 12+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12

(red) or G 11. Never mix G12 (red colour) with G 11.

Checking the coolant level and topping up

The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-

tioning of the engine cooling system.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on

page 211.

Opening the coolant expa

Switch off the engine a

To prevent scalding, co

thick cloth and careful

Checking coolant level

Look into the open coo

coolant level.

If the level is undernea

Topping up coolant

Only use new coolant.

Do not fill above the M

Closing the coolant expan

Screw the cap on agai

The position of the coolant ex

engine compartment diagram

Make sure that the coolant m

Do not use a different type of

able. In this case use only wa

to the correct level as soon a

page 218.

Always top up with new coola

Do not fill above the MAX m

out of the cooling system wh

Fig. 143 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap

Checking and refilling levels220

windscreen wiper blades

he windscreen should always be

.

e headlight washing system are supplied with

her fluid container in the engine compartment.

right-hand side of the engine compartment.

ean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-

roduct to the windscreen washer fluid.

g products exist on the market with high deter-

s, these may be added all-year-round. Please

s on the packaging.

Fig. 144 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 220 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

The coolant additive G 12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)

and also with G 11.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 211

When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.

Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.

If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do

so will result in engine damage!

If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before

putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant

losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised

workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,

there is a risk of engine damage.

Washer fluid and

Topping up washer fluid

The water for cleaning t

mixed with washer fluid

The windscreen washer and th

fluid from the windscreen was

The reservoir is located on the

Plain water is not enough to cl

mend that you always add a p

Approved windscreen cleanin

gent and anti-freeze propertie

follow the dilution instruction

Checking and refilling levels 221

Safety Fir Technical Data

e wiper blades regularly. Change them as

iper blades

from the glass. Do not pull the arm by the

s shown by arrow fig. 145 as far as

it off as shown by arrow fig. 146 .

e of the same length and version onto the

wiper blade to the stop against the direc-

.

the starting position.

T Service.

t be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if

Fig. 146 Removing front wipers

A1

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 221 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 211.

Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen

washer fluid.

Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per

instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes

in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.

Changing the front windscreen wiper blades

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.

Check the condition of th

required.

Change the windscreen w

Lift the wiper arm away

blade.

Turn the wiper blade a

it will go and then pull

Push a new wiper blad

wiper arm and turn the

tion shown by arrow

Place the wiper arm in

These are available from SEA

If the wipers scrape they mus

they are dirty.

Fig. 145 Windscreen wipers raised

A1

Checking and refilling levels222

r blade

should be replaced immediately.

wiper blade regularly. Change as

lade

from the rear window.

as shown by arrow fig. 147 and, at

wiper blade as shown by arrow .

e from the wiper arm.

blade from the wiper arm in the opposite

Fig. 147 Changing a rear wiper blade

A1

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 222 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-

screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified

workshop and corrected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.

The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

Caution Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to

clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.

Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually - this

could cause damage!

Note On fitting the wiper blades, do not exchange the driver and passenger

side blades.

Changing the rear wipe

A damaged wiper blade

Check the condition of the

required.

Changing the rear wiper b

Lift the wiper arm away

Release the wiper blade

the same time, pull the

Unhook the wiper blad

Now take off the wiper

direction to arrow .A2

Checking and refilling levels 223

Safety Fir Technical Data

id level

ed at the intervals given in the service

at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It

een the MIN and MAX marks.

reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine

e 262. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and

ightly when the vehicle is being used as the

adjusted as they wear.

Fig. 148 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 223 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Insert a new wiper blade of the same length and design in the

direction of arrow and hook the blade back onto the wiper

arm.

Now pull the wiper blade against the direction of arrow until

it engages.

Push the wiper arm back against the glass.

These are available from SEAT Service.

If the wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned if soiled.

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-

screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified

workshop and corrected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.

The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

Caution Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to

clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.

Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually - this

could cause damage!

Note The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the

bonnet is properly closed.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake flu

The brake fluid is check

schedule.

Read off the fluid level

should always be betw

The position of the brake fluid

compartment diagram pag

yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops sl

brake pads are automatically

A2

A2

Checking and refilling levels224

et to check the brake fluid level, read and e 211.

red in the closed original container in a safe . There is a toxic risk.

change according to the Maintenance kes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid ng. This would seriously affect the efficiency

of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the

vironment d disposed of in the proper manner observing

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 224 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instru-

ment panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low page 72.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 211.

Changing the brake fluid

The Maintenance Program indicates the brake fluid change

intervals.

We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised

Service Centre.

Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings in

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on page 211 in

Working in the engine compartment.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from

the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake

system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the

brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which

could impair the braking effect.

It is important that you use only brake fluid compliant with the US standard

FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.

Before opening the bonn observe the warnings pag

Brake fluid should be sto place out of reach of children

Complete the brake fluid Program. Heavy use of the bra is left in the system for too lo of the brakes and the safety

Caution Brake fluid could damage the

paintwork immediately.

For the sake of the en Brake fluid must be drained an

environmental regulations.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 225

Safety Fir Technical Data

ery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause

re of gases is released when the battery is should be charged in a well-ventilated room

acid and batteries.

ectrical system, you must switch off the consumers. The negative cable on the battery n a light bulb is changed, you need only switch

alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you alarm will otherwise be triggered.

battery from the vehicle electrical system, e cable and then the positive cable.

onsumers before reconnecting the battery. cable and then the negative cable. Never onnections. This could cause an electrical fire.

ttery, or one which has thawed. This could mical burns. Always replace a battery which

n freeze at temperatures around 0 C.

e is always connected to the battery.

ttery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a ly.

ery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine

e the electrical system or electronic compo-

to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as

on can damage the battery housing.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 225 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Battery

Warnings on handling the battery

WARNING

Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical system:

Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead.

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi- ately.

Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited. When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic

charge. Never short the batt injury.

A highly explosive mixtu under charge. The batteries only.

Keep children away from

Before working on the el engine, the ignition and all must be disconnected. Whe off the light.

Deactivate the anti-theft disconnect the battery! The

When disconnecting the disconnect first the negativ

Switch off all electrical c Reconnect first the positive reverse the polarity of the c

Never charge a frozen ba result in explosions and che has frozen. A flat battery ca

Ensure that the vent hos

Never use a defective ba damaged battery immediate

Caution Never disconnect the batt

is running. This could damag

nents.

Do not expose the battery

the intense ultraviolet radiati

Wear eye protection

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-

tive gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the

battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels226

the vehicle battery

nce-free and is checked during the

ork on the vehicle battery requires

ces or if the vehicle is not driven for long

checked by a qualified workshop between the

nd you have problems starting the vehicle, the

this happens, we recommend you have the

Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-

charged by a qualified workshop only, as

logy have been installed and they must be

nment.

ed to suit the conditions of its location and has

he maintenance, performance and safety spec-

nly maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This

on the batteries, you must read and observe ings on handling the battery on page 225.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 226 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect

the battery from frost. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Checking the electrolyte level

The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-

mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.

Open the bonnet and open the battery cover at the front in

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on

page 211 in Warnings on handling the battery on

page 225.

Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the

battery.

If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until

they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-

ment diagram page 262.

The round window (magic eye) on the top of the battery changes colour,

depending on the charge level and electrolyte level of the battery.

If the colour in the window is colourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level

of the battery is too low. Have the battery checked by a qualified workshop.

The colours green and black are used by the workshops for diagnostic

purposes.

Charging and changing

The battery is maintena

inspection service. All w

specialist knowledge.

If you often drive short distan

periods, the battery should be

scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged a

battery might be damaged. If

vehicle battery checked by an

charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be

batteries using special techno

charged in a controlled enviro

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been develop

special safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil t

ifications of your vehicle.

WARNING

We recommend you use o batteries which comply with standard applies as of 2001.

Before starting any work the warnings in Warn

Checking and refilling levels 227

Safety Fir Technical Data

page 187.

ay vary, according to the type and make of tyre

ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual

one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres

be checked immediately by an Authorised

attern

indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with

erve the direction of rotation indicated when

tees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-

wear.

aximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- f accident.

d tyres. This may cause an accident.

ration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 227 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They

must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary

household waste.

Wheels

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very

slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,

etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of

rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly

when you replace them.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a

cool, dry and preferably dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel

rims.

New tyres

New tyres have to be run in

The tread depth of new tyres m

and the tread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is o

vibrations or the car pulling to

is damaged. The tyres should

Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread p

An arrow on the tyre sidewall

directional tread. Always obs

fitting the wheel. This guaran

planing, excessive noise and

WARNING

New tyres do not have m larly carefully to avoid risk o

Never drive with damage

If you notice unusual vib driving, stop the vehicle imm

Checking and refilling levels228

dependent on tyre pressure, driving

Fig. 149 Tyre tread wear indicators

Fig. 150 Changing wheels

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 228 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the

inside of the tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The

values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2

bar to the values given on the sticker.

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are

cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be

reduced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure

should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a

journey.

WARNING

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Tyre service life

The service life of tyres is

style and fitting.

Checking and refilling levels 229

Safety Fir Technical Data

accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

ed at the latest when the tread is worn down to ilure to do so could result in an accident. Worn h speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater

eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes heat. This can cause tread separation and tyre

lways observe the recommended tyre pres-

ear, you should have the running gear checked ntre.

oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

res must be replaced immediately!

nvironment ase fuel consumption.

ave to be run-in.

an essential part of the vehicle's design. The

EAT are specially matched to the characteristics

jor contribution to good road holding and safe

east in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front

er). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 229 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators

page 228, fig. 149, running across the tread. Depending on the make,

there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on

the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the

positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by

law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-

tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export

countries .

Tyre pressure

Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.

For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month

page 228.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable

to change them around as shown page 228, fig. 150. All the tyres will then

last for about the same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-

tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results

in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive

wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced

when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of

the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-

ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of

The tyres must be replac the tread wear indicators. Fa tyres do not grip well at hig risk of aquaplaning.

At continuously high spe more. This causes it to over blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.

If tyres show excessive w by an Authorised Service Ce

Keep chemicals such as

Damaged wheels and ty

For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres will incre

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels h

The tyres and wheel rims are

tyres and rims approved by S

of the vehicle and make a ma

handling .

Tyres should be replaced at l

tyres or both rear tyres togeth

Checking and refilling levels230

on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all

se with an unknown history of use.

ed, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.

itted with radial tyres of the same type, size e same tread pattern.

vironment according to the laws in the country concerned.

not generally possible to use the wheels from

pply to wheels of the same model. The use of

t been approved by SEAT for use with your

icle's type approval for use on public roads.

same as the tyres that are mounted on the

er tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for

e with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel

htened to the correct torque.

atched to the rims. If different wheel rims are

with the right length and correctly shaped bolt

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 230 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations

marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

195 Tyre width in mm

65 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

15 Rim diameter in inches

91 Load rating code

T Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following information:

A direction of rotation symbol

Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only

on the inner side of the wheel).

DOT... 1105... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th

week of 2005.

We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised

Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary

special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of

the old tyres.

Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical require-

ments when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

WARNING

We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicle you have no alternative, you times.

Never use old tyres or tho

If wheel trims are retrofitt brakes is not restricted. This

All four wheels must be f (rolling circumference) and th

For the sake of the en Old tyres must be disposed of

Note For technical reasons, it is

other vehicles. This can also a

wheels or tyres which have no

model may invalidate the veh

If the spare tyre is not the

vehicle - for example with wint

a short period of time and driv

as soon as possible.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tig

The design of wheel bolts is m

fitted, the correct wheel bolts

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 231

Safety Fir Technical Data

ter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-

radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the

pply to winter tyres.

veness when the tread is worn down to a depth

e 229, New tyres and wheels determines the

hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted

e sticker in the driver's field of view. These

ur Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-

e followed.

d for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with

hen the roads are free of snow and ice.

refer to the notes on the spare wheel

wheels.

winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, ge and thus, an accident risk.

nvironment time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly

.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 231 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the

brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -

even if it is the same model page 204.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.

If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.

Caution The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and

ice.

In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicles

handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread

pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.

Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures

specified for summer tyres (see sticker on tank flap).

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Information on permitted win tration documents. Use only

vehicle documentation also a

Winter tyres lose their effecti

of 4 mm.

The speed rating code pag

following speed limits:

Q max. 160 km/h

S max. 180 km/h

T max. 190 km/h

H max. 210 km/h

In some countries, vehicles w

tyre must have an appropriat

stickers are available from yo

ments of each country must b

Do not have winter tyres fitte

summer tyres handle better w

If you have a flat tyre, please

page 229, New tyres and

WARNING

The maximum speed for the this could lead to tyre dama

For the sake of the e Fit your summer tyres in good

and reduce fuel consumption

Checking and refilling levels232

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 232 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre

sizes page 260.

Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more that 15

mm, including tension device.

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety

reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be

fitted over the wheel bolts.

WARNING

Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.

Caution You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.

Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very

quickly.

Note In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The legal

requirements of the country should be followed.

If and when 233

Safety Fir Technical Data

n the luggage compartment, behind the side

cured using a thumb screw fig. 151 . The

ng items:

n socket in the handle for slackened wheel

ade is reversible. The screwdriver is in the wheel

3 mm

off the centre cover and the wheel bolt caps

Fig. 151 Storage of vehicle tools

A1

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 233 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

If and when

Vehicle tools*, spare wheel*, breakdown set* and towing bracket

Location

The vehicle tools, the spare wheel and the removable ball

coupling of the towing bracket are stored in the luggage

compartment.

Vehicle tool kit and removable ball coupling

The vehicle tool kit and removable towing bracket ball coupling are stored on

the right of the luggage compartment, behind a cover.

Spare wheel

The spare wheel is stored underneath the vehicle page 234.

Caution Make sure that the spare wheel / removed wheel and the tools are stored

safely in the luggage compartment.

Vehicle tools*

The vehicle tools are stored i

cover on the right and are se

tool kit comprises the followi

Tool box44)

Screwdriver with hexago

bolts. The screwdriver bl

bolt.

Towing eye, removable

Open jaw spanner 10 x 1

Wire hook44) for pulling

44) Optional equipment

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

If and when234

eel

152 located on the floor of the luggage

he tailgate lock.

er seal upwards.

er from the vehicle tools.

he bolt, to the maximum, and hold in this

me press the safety ring downwards

several times to the left, until the spare

nging from a wire, vertically behind the

ces so that they may be inserted into the

rim and so free the wheel.

Fig. 152 Taking out the spare wheel

AB

AC

AD

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 234 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Box spanner for wheel bolts

Jack. Before you return the jack to the tool box, you must fully wind in the

claw. The crank must then be folded tight against the side of the jack.

The removable towing bracket44), the key for unlocking the sunroof in an

emergency44) and the anti-theft wheel bolt adaptor44) are stored next to the

vehicle tools.

Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts

We recommend you carry the wheel bolt adapter44) in the vehicle tool kit at

all times.

The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the

adapter. You will need this number to replace the adapter if lost. Make a note

the code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place - but

not in your vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts. It is not suitable for tightening the bolts to the necessary torque. This may cause an accident.

The jack supplied by the factory is only designed for changing wheels on this model. Never attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.

Use the jack only on firm, level ground.

Never start the engine when you have raised the vehicle on the jack. Risk of accident.

Never place your body (e.g. arm or leg) underneath the vehicle if it is only supported by the jack Risk of injury.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle - Risk of accident!.

Taking out the spare wh

1. Lift the cover fig.

compartment, next to t

2. Pull the ring of the rubb

3. Remove the box spann

4. Fit the box spanner on t

position. At the same ti

.

5. Turn the box spanner

wheel can be fitted, ha

vehicle.

6. Separate the plastic pie

central aperture of the

A6

A7

AA

AC

If and when 235

Safety Fir Technical Data

er page 234, fig. 152 and turn the

luggage compartment several times to the

e wheel is firmly secured against the

ompartment floor in Taking out

age 234.

the rubber seal page 234, fig. 152

.

age compartment to a maximum torque of 25

AC

AB

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 235 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

If you are driving without the spare wheel, the cable should be rolled up and the bracket fastened to the floor of the luggage compartment.

Fitting the defective wheel in the spare wheel casing

1. Place the wheel behind the vehicle.

2. Insert the support on the inside of the defective wheel, through

a central opening.

3. Insert the defective wheel below the vehicle, with the outer side

facing downwards.

4. Remove the box spann

bolt on the floor of the

right, until the defectiv

inside of the luggage c

the spare wheel on p

5. Close the opening with

and lower the cover

WARNING

Tighten the bolt of the lugg Nm.

Breakdown set*

Fig. 153 Resting point for the spare wheel on the bumper

AA

If and when236

bottle of tyre sealant Do not use sealant paste

re sealant can be obtained at any SEAT dealer.

sealant observing any legal requirements.

tions from the anti-puncture kit's manufacturer

ing bracket, it is first necessary to remove the

i-puncture kit.

i-puncture kit

mm in diameter), particularly ones

led using the anti-puncture set.

p the car well away from moving traffic.

ing lights and set the emergency triangle

legal requirements when doing so.

d the bottle of sealant from the luggage

ure sticker fig. 154 and apply it to

here it can be seen clearly.

(e. g. screw, nail) in the tyre.

valve.

A2

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 236 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Components

Components

The anti-puncture kit contains the following components:

Tyre valve remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50mph

Filler tube with cap

Compressor

Tube for inflating tyres

Pressure gauge

Air bleed screw

ON/OFF switch

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant Spare tyre valve

Caution Note the expiry date on the

that has expired. A bottle of ty

Dispose of used or expired

Likewise, note any instruc

(if included).

Note In vehicles fitted with a tow

tools in order to reach the ant

Preparation of ant

Small punctures (up to 4

in the tread, can be sea

If you have a puncture, sto

Switch on the hazard warn

in position. Please observe

Take the compressor an

compartment.

Remove the anti/punct

the instrument panel w

Leave the foreign body

Take the cap off the tyre

Fig. 154 Contents of anti- puncture kit

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

If and when 237

Safety Fir Technical Data

or using the ON/OFF switch for at least

til a tyre pressure of between 2,0 and 2,5

This should take a maximum of 6 minutes.

r when the pressure reaches 2,0 and 2,5

is not reached, unscrew the valve inflator

pressor back in the vehicle.

10 metres forwards or backwards so that

istributed in the tyre interior.

ut again, screw the inflator tube well into

e tyre again.

e can still not be reached, the tyre is too

re cannot be sealed with the anti-puncture

avel in the vehicle and contact the nearest

ssor and unscrew the compressor tyre

e valve.

aximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) once

2.5 bar has been reached.

e after you have been driving for

A8

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 237 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Use the enclosed extractor page 236, fig. 154 to unscrew

the valve insert. Place the valve insert on a clean surface.

Vigorously shake the sealant bottle page 236, fig. 154 for

several seconds.

Sealing and inflating tyres

Inflating the tyre

Thread the inflating tube fig. 155 on the valve.

Check that the air bleed screw is screwed tight.

Start the engine and leave it running in neutral.

Attach the connector to a 12 volt socket of the vehicle.

Connect the compress

six minutes.

Run the compressor un

bar has been reached.

Detach the compresso

bars.

If the desired pressure

tube and store the com

Move the vehicle some

the sealant is evenly d

Take the compressor o

the valve and inflate th

If the required pressur

badly damaged. The ty

kit. Do not attempt to tr

qualified dealership.

Disconnect the compre

filler hose from the tyr

Drive the vehicle at a m

a tyre pressure of 2.0 -

Check the tyre pressur

10 minutes.

A1

A10

Fig. 155 Contents of anti- puncture kit

A5

A7

A9

If and when238

op the car well away from moving traffic. g lights and set the emergency triangle in l requirements when doing so.

ve the car.

ly and engage a gear or put the gear selector heel opposite the wheel being changed with

, unhitch it from your vehicle.

e been approved for your vehicle by SEAT.

n if they have been approved for use on other slip. Risk of injury.

en the vehicle is raised. This may cause an

g. arm or leg) underneath the vehicle if it is isk of injury.

neath the vehicle, you must use suitable rt the vehicle - Risk of accident!.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 238 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

WARNING

Do not allow the sealant to get onto your skin or into your eyes. Risk of injury.

Keep children away from the sealant.

Changing a wheel

Preparation

You must park the vehicle correctly before changing a tyre.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the car as far away from

the flow of traffic as possible on a flat surface.

Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Apply the handbrake firmly and engage a gear or put the selector

in the P position.

Chock the wheel opposite the wheel being changed with a stone

or similar object.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.

Remove the spare wheel and the vehicle tools from the luggage

compartment.

All passengers should leave the car. They should wait in a safe

place (for instance behind the safety barrier).

WARNING

If you have a puncture, st Switch on the hazard warnin position. Please observe lega

All passengers should lea

Apply the handbrake firm in the P position. Chock the w a stone or similar object.

If you are towing a trailer

Only use jacks which hav

Never use other jacks, eve SEAT models. The jack could

Never start the engine wh accident.

Never place your body (e. only supported by the jack R

If you have to work under stands additionally to suppo

If and when 239

Safety Fir Technical Data

the wheel bolts

ved from the wheel bolts before the

ed.

m the vehicle tool kit.

h the opening in the middle of the cap

move the caps.

olts and should be replaced after changing the

the caps click securely into place. They could

Fig. 157 Use the hook to pull off the cap

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 239 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Removing the hubcaps

The hubcaps must be removed to gain access to the wheel

bolts.

Take the wire hook from the vehicle tool kit.

Insert the hook into a hole in the cover fig. 156.

Pull off the cover.

Removing the caps from

The caps must be remo

wheel bolts are unscrew

Take the wire hook fro

Insert the hook throug

fig. 157.

Use the wire hook to re

The caps protect the wheel b

tyre.

When fitting, make sure that

otherwise fall off.

Fig. 156 Removing the hubcaps

If and when240

far as it will go over the wheel bolt

spanner and turn the wheel bolt one turn

l bolts

ti-theft wheel bolts out of the vehicle tool

to the wheel bolt. Push it in as far as it will

ar as it will go over the adapter.

spanner and turn the wheel bolt one turn

you may be able to loosen it by pushing down

ly with your foot. Hold on to the car for support

nly about one turn before raising the vehicle

outer ring, the grooved wheel bolts should d cause leaks resulting in accident.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 240 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Loosening the wheel bolts

A special adapter is required to slacken the anti-theft wheel

bolts. It is contained in the vehicle tool kit.

Loosening wheel bolts

Fit the box spanner as

fig. 158.

Grip the end of the box

anti-clockwise .

Loosening anti-theft whee

Take the adapter for an

kit45).

Insert the adapter45) in

go fig. 159.

Fit the box spanner as f

Grip the end of the box

anti-clockwise .

Loosening wheel bolts

If the wheel bolt is very tight,

the end of the spanner careful

and take care not to slip.

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts o with the jack.

For wheels with a bolted never be loosened. This coul

Fig. 158 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts

Fig. 159 Changing the wheel: anti-theft wheel bolts and adapter

45) Optional equipment

If and when 241

Safety Fir Technical Data

til you have slackened the wheel bolts on

ove page 240.

int fig. 160 (arrow) closest to the

anged.

e jacking point until it just fits under the

the jack has full contact with the ground.

ntinue to crank the claw up until it is in

rtical rib fig. 161 (arrow) underneath

until the wheel is just clear of the ground.

at the jacking points shown fig. 160. The

11 cm from the wheel arch. The rear jacking

e wheel arch. Notches on both sides in the sills

ts are under the vehicle.

f or damage the vehicle if you do not observe

ck may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. or the jack on the ground. If necessary use a r support. On a hard, slippery surface (such as

milar to prevent the jack from slipping.

the vertical rib under the sill properly so that en you are raising the vehicle fig. 161.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 241 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Raising the vehicle

Raise the vehicle using only the designated jacking points.

Do not raise the vehicle un

the wheel you wish to rem

Jacking up the vehicle

1. Look for the jacking po

tyre which has to be ch

2. Raise the jack under th

car.

3. Check that the foot of

4. Adjust the jack and co

position around the ve

the vehicle

5. Crank the jack further

The jack may be applied only

front jacking point is approx.

point is approx. 14 cm from th

show where the jacking poin

WARNING

You could injure yoursel the correct jacking points.

Soft ground under the ja Always provide a firm base f large, strong board or simila tiles) use a rubber mat or si

The jack claw must grasp the jack does not slip off wh

Fig. 160 The jacking points

Fig. 161 Jack at rear on right

If and when242

wheel. This is important so that these tyres can

excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

to mount a wheel so it rotates in the wrong

mely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum

rly important when driving on wet roads. To

f tyres with directional tread pattern, the tyre

s possible so that it rotates in the correct direc-

clean and turn easily. Do not grease or oil them.

e screwdriver handle should be used for

ot use it to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.

defective tyre in the spare wheel bracket

ed as quickly as possible.

ue of the wheel bolts checked as soon as

wrench page 242.

the next opportunity.

euvres.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 242 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Note The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle should be used for turning

wheel bolts only. Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.

Changing a wheel

Removing the wheel

Using the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle, unscrew

the slackened wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface.

Take off the wheel.

Store the defective wheel as described on page 235.

Fitting the spare wheel

Put the spare wheel in place.

Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the

hexagonal socket.

Lower the vehicle on the jack.

Tighten the wheel bolts firmly using the box spanner. Do not

tighten the bolts in clockwise or anti-clockwise sequence.

Tighten them in diagonal sequence.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern must be mounted so that they rotate in the

correct direction.

A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that

point in the direction of rotation. Always observe the direction of rotation

indicated when mounting the

give maximum grip and avoid

If, in an emergency, you have

direction, you must drive extre

performance. This is particula

benefit from the advantages o

should be replaced as soon a

tion.

Caution The wheel bolts should be

The hexagonal socket in th

turning wheel bolts only. Do n

After changing a wheel

Place the wheel with the

page 235.

Have the flat tyre replac

Have the tightening torq

possible with a torque

Check tyre pressure at

Avoid fast driving mano

If and when 243

Safety Fir Technical Data

find out where, and in which fuse box, the

ed page 244.

and the component concerned.

over fig. 162.

n the fuse box to remove the fuse.

he metal strip will have melted), replace it

same amp rating (same colour and same

its are protected by fuses. It is advisable to carry

es.

Fig. 162 Left side of dash panel fusebox

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 243 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.

Caution The stipulated torque for the wheel bolts on steel wheels and alloy wheels is

170 Nm with a tolerance of 10 Nm. You should visit a specialised workshop

as soon as possible to check the torque with a torque wrench.

Note The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Do not grease or oil them.

The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle should be used only for

turning wheel bolts which have been slackened off. Do not use it to loosen or

tighten the wheel bolts.

If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when

changing a wheel, they must be replaced before you have the tightening

torque checked.

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the car -

for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for a short

period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon

as possible.

Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

Fuses

Changing a fuse

Use the fuse tables, to

damaged fuse is locat

Switch off the ignition

Remove the fuse box c

Use the plastic pliers i

If the fuse has blown (t

with a new fuse of the

imprint) and size.

The individual electrical circu

several spare fuses at all tim

If and when244

over one single fuse.

lacement fuses.

hicle. These should be changed by a qualified

Symbol

-

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 244 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Colour coding of fuses

WARNING

Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with higher rating fuses. This could cause fires.

Note If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the elec-

trical system checked by a qualified dealership as soon as possible.

If you replace a fuse with a stronger fuse, you could cause damage to

another location in the electrical system.

Fuse table

The table shows the fuse locations for the most important consumers. The

right-hand columns contain the insert location, the figures in brackets indi-

cate the Ampre rating for the fuse. One single consumer could have more

than one fuse.

Several consumers could run

The fuse box has space for rep

There are other fuses in the ve

dealership.

Colour Amp rating

violet 3

light brown 5

brown 7,5

red 10

blue 15

yellow 20

transparent 25

green 30

Electrical consumer

Dipped headlights

Electrical socket for trailer

Turn signals

Brake lights

Main beam headlights

Rear window heater

Rear windscreen wiper

Horn

Interior lights

Electric windows

Usable electric windows

Fog lights

Rear fog light

If and when 245

Safety Fir Technical Data

ed by a professional mechanic only.

red to change bulbs. This is because, in certain

only by removing other vehicle components.

ulbs which can be accessed only from the

nged by a qualified dealership or, if this is not

n.

ge the bulb, please observe the following:

must switch off the light (light switch in O posi-

r must be in the neutral position.

bs with identical bulbs with the same designa-

the bulb, either on the glass or on the base.

bulbs in the vehicle for safety-relevant lights.

EAT Service Centres.

t of gas discharge lamps must be handled could result in fatal injuries.

d and could explode when they are being

s discharge lamps*, there is a mortal danger if he lamp is incorrectly handled.

ine compartment, always observe the safety

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 245 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Changing a light

Bulbs, changing

Bulbs should be chang

Technical knowledge is requi

cases, access can be gained

This applies in particular to b

engine compartment.

We recommend bulbs are cha

possible, by a qualified perso

However, if you wish to chan

Before changing a bulb, you

tion), and the turn signal leve

Always replace damaged bul

tion. The type is inscribed on

You should store spare light

Bulbs can be obtained from S

WARNING

The high voltage elemen correctly. Failure to comply

H7* bulbs are pressurise changed. Risk of injury.

In vehicles fitted with ga the high voltage section of t

When working in the eng warnings page 211.

Hazard warning light switch Instrument panel lighting Climate control Heating Radio, navigation system /

Rear light -

Registration plate light Windscreen washers Windscreen washer system Sliding sunroof Seat heating Mirror adjustment Heating the exterior mirrors Side lights Socket (luggage compartment) Central locking. -

Electrical consumer Symbol

If and when246

s bulb and replace with a new bulb.

in the turn signal guide rail.

n the opening of the chassis, securing

164 and then, fit the bulb as shown by

ilgate should always be opened.

layout:

ake/rear light.

g light.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 246 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Side indicator lamps

Slide the turn signal forwards fig. 163 and remove .

Remove the lamp holder and separate.

Remove the failed glas

Insert the lamp holder

First fit the turn signal i

with the tabs fig.

the arrow .

Rear lights

Before changing a bulb, the ta

The lights have the following

On the body

Turn signals, pilot light and br

On the tailgate / rear door

Reversing light and rear antifo

Fig. 163 Side indicator

Fig. 164 Side indicator

A1 A2

A1

A2

If and when 247

Safety Fir Technical Data

e trim.

Fig. 166 Lights on tail- gate

Fig. 167 Lights on tail- gate

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 247 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Lights on vehicle body

Open the cover in the luggage compartment trim.

Press the side tabs in the direction of arrow fig. 165.

Press the defective bulb into the bulb carrier, then turn it to the

left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb and turn to the right as far as possible.

Fit the lampholder, press in until the tabs click into place.

Lights on tailgate

Remove the cover in th

Fig. 165 Lights on vehicle body

If and when248

s bulb and replace with a new bulb.

hout overtightening, ensuring that the

orresponding space in the tailgate

r seal and the light are assembled

lass too tightly.

r or similar between the casing and the

9 and carefully remove the glass.

Fig. 169 Interior light

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 248 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Press the elastic tab in the direction of the arrow page 247,

fig. 166 and remove the lampholder downwards.

Press the defective bulb into the bulb carrier, then turn it to the

left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb and turn to the right as far as possible.

Fit the lampholder in the corresponding opening at the front

tab and press the lampholder upwards at the back , until the

elastic tab engages page 247, fig. 167.

Replace the cover. To do so, insert the the two tabs of the exterior

part of the cover behind the tailgate trim and push the cover

upwards until it goes into position.

Registration plate light

Remove the glass

Remove the failed glas

Bolt down the glass wit

seal is perfectly fitted.

Fit the reflector in the c

ensuring that the rubbe

correctly.

Do not bolt down the g

Interior light

Insert a fine screwdrive

glass (arrow) fig. 16

A1

A2

Fig. 168 Registration light

If and when 249

Safety Fir Technical Data

bracket (interior light and reading light),

screwdriver between the light and the

e screwdriver.

f the back of the lamp in the direction of

nd separate.

lamp (with glass bulb).

he casing and guide it towards the right as

rst on the left and then insert it in the

trim.

Fig. 171 Reading lights

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 249 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Replace the bulb.

Replace the glass in the casing.

Reading light

Remove the complete

place the flat end of a

ceiling trim and turn th

Turn the lampholder o

the arrow fig. 170 a

Remove the defective

Fit a new lamp.

Replace the mount in t

far as possible.

Replace the bracket, fi

opening in the ceiling

Fig. 170 Reading lights

If and when250

ription

ery is and the charged battery .

tions

n both vehicles .

red jump lead to the positive fig. 172

cle with the flat battery .

of the red jump lead to the positive

cle providing assistance.

black jump lead to the negative terminal

vehicle providing assistance.

Fig. 172 How to connect the jump leads

AA AB

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 250 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be

connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's

documentation). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol

engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

soon as the positive terminals are connected.

The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicles elec-

trical system.

How to jump start: desc

In fig. 172, the flat batt

Jump lead terminal connec

Switch off the ignition o

1. Connect one end of the

terminal of the vehi

2. Connect the other end

terminal in the vehi

3. Connect one end of the

on the battery of the

A+

A+

A-

If and when 251

Safety Fir Technical Data

arnings referring to working in the engine Working in the engine compartment.

sistance must have the same voltage as the flat ately the same capacity (see imprint on ould result in an explosion.

en one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of ttery has thawed, battery acid could leak and attery freezes, it should be replaced.

lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger ply could result in an explosion.

provided by the manufacturer of the jump

tive cable from the other vehicle directly to the battery. The gas emitted from the battery could r of explosion.

ve cable from the other vehicle to parts of the ine.

of the battery clamps must not be allowed to ed to the positive battery terminal must not icle, this can cause a short circuit.

h a way that they cannot come into contact e engine compartment.

tteries. This could result in chemical burns.

each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

s are connected.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 251 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

4. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a solid metal

component which is bolted on to the engine block, or onto the

engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not

connect it to a point near the battery .

5. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into

contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Starting

6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let

it run at idling speed.

7. Start the engine of the car with the flat battery and wait one or

two minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

8. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the headlights (if

they are switched on).

9. Turn on the heater blower and rear window heater in the vehicle

with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are

generated when the leads are disconnected.

10. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse

order to the details given above.

Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with

the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and

try again after about half a minute.

WARNING

Please note the safety w compartment page 211,

The battery providing as battery (12V) and approxim battery). Failure to comply c

Never use jump leads wh explosion! Even after the ba cause chemical burns. If a b

Keep sparks, flames and of explosion. Failure to com

Observe the instructions leads.

Do not connect the nega negative terminal of the flat be ignited by sparks. Dange

Do not attach the negati fuel system or to the brake l

The non-insulated parts touch. The jump lead attach touch metal parts of the veh

Position the leads in suc with any moving parts in th

Do not bend over the ba

Note The vehicles must not touch

soon as the positive terminal

AX

If and when252

of the vehicle

ed on the right of the front bumper fig. 173.

essary to remove the cover.

nt towing eye

irection shown by the arrow fig. 173 levering

ront towing eye

et and press until it is firmly in place.

itted.

be kept in the vehicle. Remember the instruc-

g that are in the user's manual.

Fig. 173 Towing eye at the front of the vehicle

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 252 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting*

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting

is preferable page 250.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch on the ignition.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear

lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Towing eye at the front

The towline anchorage is locat

To access the housing it is nec

Removing the cover of the fro

- Remove the cover in the d

it out with a screwdriver.

Assembling the cover of the f

- Put the cover into its sock

- Check that it is correctly f

The towing eye should always

tions for tow starting or towin

If and when 253

Safety Fir Technical Data

as to be tow-started:

r.

d down.

and switch on the hazard warning lights.

moving, release the clutch.

starts, press the clutch and move the gear

helps to prevent driving into the towing

when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed wing vehicle.

enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

ncerning towing should be observed.

ning lights of both vehicles. However, observe

ry.

icles with an automatic gearbox must not be

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 253 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Rear towline anchorage

On the right hand side of the lower rear section of the body, there is a fixed

towline anchorage fig. 174 (arrow).

Towing bracket

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket, it should also be used for

towing other vehicles.

Tow-starting

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting

is preferable page 250.

However, if your vehicle h

Engage 2nd or 3rd gea

Keep the clutch presse

Switch on the ignition

Once both vehicles are

As soon as the engine

lever into neutral. This

vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high can easily collide with the to

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could

Note The legal requirements co

Switch on the hazard war

any regulations to the contra

For technical reasons, veh

tow-started.

Fig. 174 Rear towline anchorage

If and when254

-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a

nce, especially when using a tow-rope. Both

the technique required for towing. Inexperi-

pt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.

wing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the

unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-

chorage points.

ng towed must be switched on to prevent the

nd also to allow the use of the turn signals,

washers.

e hazard warning lights on and the ignition

ay be used to indicate that you are going to

rn signal lever accordingly. Meanwhile, the

ff. When the turn signal lever is returned to the

ing lights will automatically reconnect.

en the engine is running. In this case the pedal

does not work if the engine is not running, you

er than you normally would.

atic gearbox

N.

km/h when towing a vehicle.

km.

d, the vehicle must be towed with the front

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 254 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Notes for tow-starting or towing

If a cable is used for towing the vehicle, please observe the

following:

As the driver of the towing vehicle

Switch on the hazard warning lights. However, observe any regu-

lations to the contrary.

Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate

gradually.

Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-

matic vehicle, accelerate gently.

Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not

working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake earlier than you

would normally, but with a more gentle pressure on the brake.

As the driver of the vehicle being towed

Switch on the hazard warning lights. However, observe any regu-

lations to the contrary.

Place the gearstick in neutral or position N.

Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times.

Tow-rope or tow-bar

It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a

tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.

A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.

It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic

material.

Attach the tow-rope or the tow

towing bracket.

Driving tips

Towing requires some experie

drivers should be familiar with

enced drivers should not attem

Do not pull too hard with the to

tow-rope. When towing on an

loading and damaging the an

The ignition of the vehicle bei

steering wheel from locking a

horn, windscreen wipers and

If the vehicle is towed, with th

switched on, the turn signal m

change direction. Move the tu

hazard warning lights will go o

rest position, the hazard warn

The brake servo works only wh

has to be pressed harder.

As the power assisted steering

will need more strength to ste

Towing vehicles with an autom

Move the selector lever to

Do not drive faster than 50

Do not tow further than 50

If a breakdown truck is use

wheels raised.

If and when 255

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 175 Lifting with the lifting platform: lifting point at front left

Fig. 176 Lifting with the lifting platform: lifting point at rear left

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 255 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

WARNING

The braking behaviour and capacity of a vehicle changes when being towed or when you are trying to start the vehicle by pulling. Please observe the following notes in order to prevent injury and accident:

Inexperienced drivers should refrain from trying in order to avoid acci- dent.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

The brake must be depressed must harder as the brake servo does not operate. Take care not to bump into the towing vehicle.

More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steering does not operate when the engine is switched off.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

Accelerate smoothly and avoid any sudden movement.

Brake more in advance than usual and brake gently.

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it

page 252.

Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.

For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be

tow-started.

If, due to a breakdown, the gearbox does not have lubricant, the vehicle

should be towed with the drive wheels suspended.

If it is necessary to tow a vehicle with an automatic gearbox for more than

50 km, it should be towed by qualified personnel and with the drive wheels

suspended.

Lifting the vehicle

Vehicle lifting points

If and when256

g platform, you must check there is sufficient

f the vehicle and the lifting platform.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 256 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Your vehicle may only be lifted by a lifting platform at the points shown in the

illustrations page 255, fig. 175 and page 255, fig. 176 .

Using the jack to lift the vehicle page 241.

To prevent damage to the underside of the vehicle when lifting the vehicle,

rubber pads must be used.

Before driving onto a lifting platform, you must check there is sufficient clear-

ance between low parts of the vehicle and the lifting platform.

WARNING

If the lifting platform is inappropriate or the vehicle is lifted incorrectly, accidents or injuries may be caused. The vehicle could even fall from the lifting platform.

All occupants should leave the vehicle before it is lifted.

The vehicle must only be lifted at the points indicated in the diagrams page 255, fig. 175 and page 255, fig. 176. If the vehicle is not lifted at the indicated points, it may fall from the platform while the engine or gearbox is being dismounted, for example.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Risk of accident. The vehicle may fall from the platform due to the engine vibrations.

When work is being carried out underneath the vehicle, it must be secured using suitable frames. If not, an accident may occur.

To lift the vehicle, only two-pillar or two-post lifting platforms with sufficiently long arms and load-bearing capacity should be used.

Lifting platforms with fluid filled cushions may not be used for lifting the vehicle.

Caution The vehicle should never be lifted at the engine oil sump, the gearbox, or

the front or rear axle. This could cause serious damage to the vehicle.

Before driving onto a liftin

clearance between low parts o

General notes on the technical data 257

Safety Fir Technical Data

if additional equipment is fitted, for different

nd for other countries.

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 257 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Technical Data

General notes on the technical data

What you should be aware of

General notes

All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data.

All data in these documents are valid for the basic model as offered in Spain.

The vehicle data card included in the inspection and maintenance schedule

in the vehicles registration documents show which engine is installed in the

vehicle.

The figures may be different

models, for special vehicles a

Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data

Abbreviation Meaning

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power

at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres

g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per kilometre.

CO2 Carbon dioxide

CN Cetane number, indication of the ignition quality of the diesel.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

General notes on the technical data258

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 258 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside

the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-

hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located

on the right hand side of the engine compartment.

Type plate

The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the

luggage compartment.

The following information can be found in the vehicle information:

Vehicle identification number (chassis number)

Vehicle type / engine power / gearbox type

Engine and gearbox code / paint number / interior equipment

Optional extras / PR numbers

This information also figures in the Maintenance Program.

General notes on the technical data 259

Safety Fir Technical Data

vehicle to another.

on figures are calculated in accordance with the

00/EC. These test requirements specify a real-

ormal everyday driving.

are applied:

in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The

r the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban

xide emissions. The gas composition is then

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 259 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

How are the figures measured?

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one

The fuel consumption, CO2 emissions and actual kerb weight of the vehicle

are noted on the vehicle data sticker.

The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the weight

category of the car, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox

combination and the equipment fitted.

The consumption and emissi

EC test requirements 1999/1

istic test method based on n

The following test conditions

Note Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on

personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the condi-

tion of the vehicle.

Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated.

Extra urban cycle In the extra urban cycle the vehicle undergoes frequent acceleration and braking

road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.

Combined The average overall consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37% fo

cycle.

CO2 emissions The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dio

analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emissions.

General notes on the technical data260

t exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint

t exceed 85 kg.

e recommend that you always tow

awbar load. The response of the trailer on the

r load is too small.

rawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,

axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle

least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal

.

ould not drive at speeds above 80 km/h when plies to countries where higher speeds are

m trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible total weight is exceeded, the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.

ins, wheel bolts

ure values can be found on the inside of the

lues given there are for cold tyres. The slightly

s must not be reduced .

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 260 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity

and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the

weight of the driver.

For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of

accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase .

WARNING

Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and requirements.

Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive

trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are

valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain

circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-

tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these

data .

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted weigh

of the towing bracket must no

In the interest of road safety, w

approaching the maximum dr

road will be poor if the drawba

If the maximum permissible d

empty and light-weight single

base of less than 1 metre), at

stipulation for a drawbar load

WARNING

For safety reasons, you sh towing a trailer. This also ap permitted.

Never exceed the maximu the permissible axle load or driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow cha

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre press

tank flap. The tyre pressure va

raised pressures of warm tyre

General notes on the technical data 261

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 261 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.

Consult the chapter wheels of this manual.

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.

If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.

Note We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information

about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

Technical Data262

ions and restrictions on the technical data are

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 262 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Technical Data

Checking fluid levels

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the

vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, to do

so may cause serious damage to the engine.

Engine oil dipstick

Oil filler neck

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath a cover)

Coolant temperature deposit

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the

components mentioned above. These operations are described in the

page 211.

Overview

Further explanations, instruct

contained as of page 257.

Fig. 177 Diagram for the location of the various elements

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Technical Data 263

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 263 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Petrol engine 1.8l 110 kW (150 bhp) 6 gear

General engine data

Performance figures

Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 5800

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 220/ 1800-4300

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1781

Compression 9,5 0,5

Fuel 95 super RONa)

a) Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol.

Maximum speed in km/h 199

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,9

Urban cycle 13,0/318

Extra urban cycle 7,4/178

Combined 9,4/225

Technical Data264

odiesel 7 % in accordance with DIN 51628

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 264 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gears four-wheel drive

General engine data

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2450

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1674

Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240

Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280

Permitted roof load in kg 75

With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700

With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1900

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896

Compression 18

Fuel Petrol min. 51 CNa) or Bi

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.

Technical Data 265

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 265 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Performance figures

Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Maximum speed in km/h 178

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 14,7

Urban cycle 9,1/240

Extra urban cycle 5,9/156

Combined 7,1/188

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1784

Gross axle weight, front in kg 1260

Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1330

Permitted roof load in kg 75

With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700

With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data266

odiesel 7% in accordance with DIN 51628

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 266 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gears

General engine data

Performance figures

Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896

Compression 18 0,5

Fuel Petrol min. 51 CNa) or Bi

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.

Maximum speed in km/h 181

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,1

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,7

Urban cycle 8,0/211

Extra urban cycle 5,6/148

Combined 6,5/172

Technical Data 267

Safety Fir Technical Data

iodiesel 7% in accordance with DIN 51628

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 267 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 85 kW (115 bhp). Automatic

General engine data

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1724/ 2003

Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240

Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280

Permitted roof load in kg 75

With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700

With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896

Compression 18 0,5

Fuel Petrol min. 51 CNa) or B

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.

Technical Data268

1757/2020

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 268 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Performance figures

Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Maximum speed in km/h 177

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15,1

Urban cycle 10,0/264

Extra urban cycle 5,9/156

Combined 7,4/196

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1757

Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240

Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280

Permitted roof load in kg 75

With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700

With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data 269

Safety Fir Technical Data

225

151

175

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 269 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Diesel engine 2.0l TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) 6 gears

General engine data

Performance figures

Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km) without DPF 46)

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103(140)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900-2500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1968

Compression 18,5 0,5

Fuel Petrol min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.

Maximum speed in km/h 192

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,2

46) Diesel particulate filters

Urban cycle 8,3/219 8,5/

Extra urban cycle 5,7/151 5,7/

Combined 6,6/175 6,7/

Technical Data270

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 270 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) 6 gears. Ecomotive

Engine specifications

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1740

Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240

Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280

Permitted roof load in kg 75

With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700

With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103(140)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900-2500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1968

Compression 18,5 0,5

Fuel Petrol min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.

Technical Data 271

Safety Fir Technical Data

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 271 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance

Performance figures

Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Maximum speed in km/h 195

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11,9

Urban cycle 7,8/206

Extra urban cycle 4,9/130

Combined 6/159

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1740

Front gross axle weight in kg 1240

Rear gross axle weight in kg 1280

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes, gradients up to 12% 700

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data272

1,810 mm/ 1,816 mm

Rear

1,518 mm

1,506 mm

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 272 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

Length, width 4,634 mm/ 4,739 mm

Height at kerb weight 1,707 mm/ 1,820 mm

Front and rear projection 892 mm/ 907 mm

Wheelbase 2,835 mm

Turning circle 11.93 m

Track widtha)

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Front

1,532 mm

1,520 mm

Capacities

Fuel tank 70 l. Reserve 8 l.

Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3.5 l/ 6 l

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.

Index 273

trays

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

omatic belt retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

omatic car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

omatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . 164

omatic gearbox with Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . 173

omatic mode

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

omatic wipe

Windscreen wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 117

matic wipe

Rear window wiper and wash . . . . . . . . . . . 118

-IN Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

l coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

tery

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30

t retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

tension device

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 273 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Index

4MOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Additional instruction manual

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Adjust seats

rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Adjusting lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Air conditioning manual

faults in operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Air conditioning system

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Air recirculation mode

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Airbag cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Airbags

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Alterations to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Alternator

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Anti-lock brake system

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Anti-locking brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Sealing and inflating tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Ash

Aut

Aut

Aut

Aut

Aut

Aut

auto

AUX

B Bal

BAS

Bat

Belt

Bel

Belt

Index274

king engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

ategorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

roup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

roup 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

roup 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

roups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

n front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

afety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

ecuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

proof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

rette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

ning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

ning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 195

ning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

ning cloth seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

ning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

ning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

ning fabric trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

ning leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

ning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

ning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

ning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

ning wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

atronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

ir outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

ontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

aults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 274 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Belt tensioner

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Brake pad wear

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Brake pad wear indicator*

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 187

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 187

Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Breakdown set

storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Bulb defect

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

C Car care

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Car phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

CD changer

Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

individual opening of doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Central stowage on instrument panel . . . . . . . 134

Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Changing a light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 242

Changing brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Changing bulbs

lights on tailgate/rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Lights on vehicle body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Registration plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Changing gear

See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Changing the bulbs

interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Changing the lamps

Side indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 226

Chec

Child

Child

C

G

G

G

G

i

S

s

Child

Ciga

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clea

Clim

A

C

f

Index 275

lay

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

r lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

r open display

warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

r release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 93

k holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

ing

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Economically / With Respect for the

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 194

With four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

ing abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

ing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

licate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

t filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

amic headlight range control . . . . . . 110, 111

nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

tric consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 150

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 275 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Second cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Coming Home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Controls

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Convenience closing

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Convenience opening

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Cool box

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 219

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Coolant level

warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Coolant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Coolant Temperature

Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Coolant temperature

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Cooling and heating box

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Notes on usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Correct adjustment of front head restraints . . . . 14

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

D Daylight driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Deadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Diagram of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Diesel engine

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Diesel engine particulate filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Diesel particulate filter

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Differential lock fault (EDL)

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Disabling airbag

front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Disabling front and side passenger airbag

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Disabling frontal airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Disp

Doo

Doo

Doo

Drin

Driv

Driv

Driv

Dup

Dus

Dyn

E Eco

EDL

EDS

Elec

Index276

brake

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

eplacing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

now chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

inter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

t airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

escription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

unction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

afety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

t passenger airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

t seats

djusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

etrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

level

isplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

ee also Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 276 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Electric windows

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

one-touch closing and opening . . . . . . . . . 103

roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Electrical accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Electrical windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Electronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Electronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 76

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 185

Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Emergency opening

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Engine

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 211

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Engine fault

indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Engine hood

See Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Engine management

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Engine oil pressure

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Engine oil temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 189

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 184

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Exhaust gas indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 198

External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

F Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 145

Fastening seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Fault in the exhaust system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Faults in operation of air conditioning . . . . . . 159

First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Foot

W

Four

R

S

W

Fron

D

F

S

Fron

Fron

a

h

s

Fuel

D

P

Fuel

D

Fuel

Fuel

S

Fuel

Fuel

Fuse

Fuse

G G 12

Index 277

p leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

p-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

with remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

-down function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

ng platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

ng the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

ting of controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

d compartment

See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

ding area

See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

ks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

gage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 144

See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . 16, 144

gage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

n beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

n beam headlights

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 277 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Gear selector lever

See Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

See Automatic gearbox with Tiptronic . . . . 173

General overview of the engine compartment . 262

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Guide lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

H Hand brake

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 174

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

head restraints

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 124

fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Headlamp washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Headlights

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Heated rear window

Heating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Hubcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Illumination of instruments and switches . . . . 110

Indicator lights

indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Individual opening of doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Instrument lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Adjusting belt routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Cleaning the child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Fastening harness belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Releasing harness belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Interior monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Intermittent wipe

rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Jum

Jum

K Key

Key

Key

Kick

L Lifti

Lifti

Ligh

Ligh

Loa

Loa

Loc

Lug

Lug

M Mai

Mai

Index278

ing the vehicle with the vehicle tool kit jack . .

241

ing lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

door

riving with the tailgate open . . . . . . . . . . 100

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

arning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

seats

haracteristics of seat equipment . . . . . . . 127

oving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

eating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

ling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

ote control key

eplacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

ynchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

irs

irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

acement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

acing the battery

emote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

acing tyres

our-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

ctor

ee Automatic belt retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 278 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Manual mode

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Mileage display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

N Navigation system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

On board computer with multifunction display*

Check working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Message on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

One-touch closing and opening

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Overview

Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

P Paintwork

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 175

Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Passenger compartment

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Trips to foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 20

Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Preheating system

indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

R Rais

Read

Rear

d

Rear

W

w

Rear

c

m

s

Rear

H

Rear

Rear

Refil

Rem

R

S

Repa

A

Repl

Repl

R

Repl

F

Retra

S

Index 279

ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Folding backrest forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Lifting seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

uring load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

ctor lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

vice interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

e airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

e lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

ing position

Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13

ing position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

ing/tilting sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

w chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232, 261

Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

kets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

re wheel

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

edometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

rting

a petrol engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 279 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Reverse gear

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Risk of front passenger seat airbag for a rear facing

child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

RME fuel (biodiesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Roll-back function

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 150

saving fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Running in

Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Running in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

S Safe Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety Instructions

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Safety notes

Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Disabling front and side passenger airbag . 45

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Saving fuel

roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Seat belt position

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Detachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

one buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

With two buckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Seat belts protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Seat layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Sea

Sec

Sele

Ser

Sho

Sid

Sid

Sitt

Sitt

Slid

Sno

Soc

Spa

Spe

Sta

Index280

signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 113

way radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

and wheels

imensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 227

rbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

stening seat belt

with one buckle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

stening seat belts

with two buckles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

r right stowage on instrument panel . . . 135

cle

ifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

cle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

cle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

cle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

cle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

cle paint

ar care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 280 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Starting the engine

after the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 166

With the ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Steam cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 161

Stowage

Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Stowage compartment

Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Sun visor

front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Sunroof blind

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Switches

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Switching off the engine

With the ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

T Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Tailgate open display*

warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Tank

Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

TCS (Traction control system)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 21

Thermos box

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 260

Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Towline anchorage

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 253

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Trailer turn signals

Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Turn

W

Two-

Type

Tyre

Tyre

Tyres

D

Tyres

Tyres

Tyres

U Unde

Unfa

(

Unfa

(

Uppe

V Vehi

L

Vehi

Vehi

Vehi

Vehi

Vehi

C

Index 281

alhambra_aleman.book Seite 281 Montag, 23. Mrz 2009 1:12 13

Vehicle tool kit jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 145

Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

W Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

warning lamp

diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

exhaust gas indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 197

Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 220

Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Wheel bolt caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 261

Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 260

Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 33

Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?

14

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 20

Why wear seatbelts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Window aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Opening and closing electrically . . . . . . . . 102

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Windscreen washer fluid

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Windscreen wiper blades

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Windscreen wipers

Changing the front blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Winter driving

Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 211

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.02.09

Portada ALHAMBRA_interior.qxd 12/3/09 15:45 Pgina 3

SE AT

A LH

A M

B R

A O

W N

ER S

M A

N U

A L

In gl

s S

10 51

1A B

A 20

( 02

.0 9)

( G

T9 )

S1 05

11 AB

A2 0

A LH

A M

B R <

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Alhambra Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Alhambra 2009 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Alhambra as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Alhambra. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Alhambra 2009 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Alhambra 2009 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Alhambra 2009 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Alhambra 2009 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Alhambra 2009 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.